PR 6943
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
e7fc76dd 4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 5@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 6@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
7@include configdoc.texi
8@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 9@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 10@c man end
252b5132
RH
11
12@c @smallbook
13
ff5dcc92
SC
14@macro gcctabopt{body}
15@code{\body\}
16@end macro
17
0285c67d
NC
18@c man begin NAME
19@ifset man
20@c Configure for the generation of man pages
21@set UsesEnvVars
22@set GENERIC
0285c67d 23@set ARM
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
3c3bdf30 29@set MMIX
2469cfa2 30@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
31@set POWERPC
32@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
33@set Renesas
34@set SPU
35@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 36@set WIN32
e0001a05 37@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
38@end ifset
39@c man end
40
252b5132
RH
41@ifinfo
42@format
43START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
44* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
45END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
46@end format
47@end ifinfo
48
0e9517a9 49@copying
e49e529d
JM
50This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
51@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
52@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
53@end ifset
54version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 55
0e9517a9 56Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000,
ad22bfe8 572001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 58
cf055d54
NC
59Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
60under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1
61or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
62with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
63Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 64section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 65@end copying
252b5132
RH
66@iftex
67@finalout
68@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 69@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 70@titlepage
71ba23f6 71@title The GNU linker
252b5132 72@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
73@subtitle @code{ld}
74@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
75@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
76@end ifset
252b5132
RH
77@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
78@author Steve Chamberlain
79@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
80@page
81
82@tex
83{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
84\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
85\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 86\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
87\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
88}
89\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
90@end tex
91
92@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 93@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9c8ebd6a 94Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
ad22bfe8 952002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d
NC
97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54
NC
119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
120Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 121section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
143@ifset HPPA
144* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
145@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
146@ifset M68HC11
147* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
152@ifset POWERPC
153* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
154@end ifset
155@ifset POWERPC64
156* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
158@ifset SPU
159* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
160@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
161@ifset TICOFF
162* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
163@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
164@ifset WIN32
165* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
166@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
167@ifset XTENSA
168* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
169@end ifset
252b5132
RH
170@end ifclear
171@ifclear SingleFormat
172* BFD:: BFD
173@end ifclear
174@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
175
176* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
177* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 178* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 179* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 180@end menu
84ec0e6d 181@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
182
183@node Overview
184@chapter Overview
185
186@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
187@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 188
0879a67a 189@ifset man
0285c67d 190@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 191ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
192@c man end
193
194@c man begin SEEALSO
195ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
196the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
197@file{ld}.
198@c man end
199@end ifset
200
201@c man begin DESCRIPTION
202
ff5dcc92 203@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 204their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 205compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 206
ff5dcc92 207@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
208a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
209to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
210
0285c67d
NC
211@ifset man
212@c For the man only
ece2d90e 213This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
214@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
215language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
216@end ifset
217
252b5132 218@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
219This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
220to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
221write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
222@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
223available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
224@end ifclear
225
226Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
227linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
228execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 229@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
230(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
231
0285c67d
NC
232@c man end
233
252b5132
RH
234@node Invocation
235@chapter Invocation
236
0285c67d
NC
237@c man begin DESCRIPTION
238
ff5dcc92 239The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
240and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
241you have many choices to control its behavior.
242
0285c67d
NC
243@c man end
244
252b5132
RH
245@ifset UsesEnvVars
246@menu
247* Options:: Command Line Options
248* Environment:: Environment Variables
249@end menu
250
251@node Options
252@section Command Line Options
253@end ifset
254
255@cindex command line
256@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
257
258@c man begin OPTIONS
259
252b5132
RH
260The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
261practice few of them are used in any particular context.
262@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 263For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
264object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
265link a file @code{hello.o}:
266
267@smallexample
268ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
269@end smallexample
270
ff5dcc92 271This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
272result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
273the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
274directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
275
ff5dcc92 276Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
277point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
278as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
279which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
280files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
281different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
282occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
283option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
284noted in the descriptions below.
285
286@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
287Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
288together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
289options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
290an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
291
292Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
293specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
294and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
295are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
296message @samp{No input files}.
297
36f63dca 298If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
299assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
300augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
301linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
302permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
303or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
304@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
305script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
306extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
307to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
308the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
309
310For options whose names are a single letter,
311option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
312whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
313option that requires them.
314
315For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 316precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 317@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 318this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 319only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
320@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
321name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
322output.
323
324Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
325option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
326immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
327@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
328Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
329accepted.
252b5132 330
36f63dca
NC
331Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
332(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
333prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
334compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
335
336@smallexample
337 gcc -Wl,--startgroup foo.o bar.o -Wl,--endgroup
338@end smallexample
339
340This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
341silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link.
342
343Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
344linker:
345
ff5dcc92 346@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 347@include at-file.texi
dff70155 348
252b5132
RH
349@kindex -a@var{keyword}
350@item -a@var{keyword}
351This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
352argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
353@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
354@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
355to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
356
357@ifset I960
358@cindex architectures
359@kindex -A@var{arch}
360@item -A@var{architecture}
361@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
362@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
363In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
364Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
365@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
366the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 367archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
368family}, for details.
369
ff5dcc92 370Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
371other architecture families.
372@end ifset
373
374@ifclear SingleFormat
375@cindex binary input format
376@kindex -b @var{format}
377@kindex --format=@var{format}
378@cindex input format
379@cindex input format
380@item -b @var{input-format}
381@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
382@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
383file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 384@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 385that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 386configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 387to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
388default input format the most usual format on each machine.
389@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
390supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
391formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
392@xref{BFD}.
393
394You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
395binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
396linking object files of different formats), by including
397@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 398particular format.
252b5132
RH
399
400The default format is taken from the environment variable
401@code{GNUTARGET}.
402@ifset UsesEnvVars
403@xref{Environment}.
404@end ifset
405You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
406@code{TARGET};
407@ifclear man
408see @ref{Format Commands}.
409@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
410@end ifclear
411
412@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
413@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
414@cindex compatibility, MRI
415@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
416@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 417For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 418files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
419@ifclear man
420@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
421@end ifclear
422@ifset man
423the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
424@end ifset
425Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 426the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
427scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
428If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
429specified by any @samp{-L} options.
430
431@cindex common allocation
432@kindex -d
433@kindex -dc
434@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 435@item -d
252b5132
RH
436@itemx -dc
437@itemx -dp
438These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
439compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
440even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
441script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
442@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
443
444@cindex entry point, from command line
445@kindex -e @var{entry}
446@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 447@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
448@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
449Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
450program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
451named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
452and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
453base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
454@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
455and other ways of specifying the entry point.
456
b58f81ae
DJ
457@kindex --exclude-libs
458@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
459Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
460exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
461@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
462automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
463port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
464explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
465option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
466be treated as hidden.
467
252b5132
RH
468@cindex dynamic symbol table
469@kindex -E
470@kindex --export-dynamic
471@item -E
472@itemx --export-dynamic
473When creating a dynamically linked executable, add all symbols to the
474dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the set of symbols
475which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
476
477If you do not use this option, the dynamic symbol table will normally
478contain only those symbols which are referenced by some dynamic object
479mentioned in the link.
480
481If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
482back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
483dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
484linking the program itself.
485
55255dae 486You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 487be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 488See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 489
36f63dca 490@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
491@cindex big-endian objects
492@cindex endianness
493@kindex -EB
494@item -EB
495Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
496
497@cindex little-endian objects
498@kindex -EL
499@item -EL
500Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 501@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
502
503@kindex -f
504@kindex --auxiliary
505@item -f
506@itemx --auxiliary @var{name}
507When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
508to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
509table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
510symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
511
512If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
513run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
514the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
515first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
516@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
517in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
518Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
519implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
520machine specific performance.
521
522This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
523will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
524
525@kindex -F
526@kindex --filter
527@item -F @var{name}
528@itemx --filter @var{name}
529When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
530the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
531of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
532on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
533
534If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
535run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
536dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
537filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
538found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
539used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
540@var{name}.
541
ff5dcc92 542Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 543toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
544object files.
545@ifclear SingleFormat
546The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 547@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 548@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
549environment variable.
550@end ifclear
551The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
552creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 553
3dbf70a2
MM
554@cindex finalization function
555@kindex -fini
556@item -fini @var{name}
557When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
558executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
559address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
560the function to call.
561
252b5132
RH
562@kindex -g
563@item -g
564Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
565
566@kindex -G
567@kindex --gpsize
568@cindex object size
569@item -G@var{value}
570@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
571Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
572@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
573MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
574sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
575
576@cindex runtime library name
577@kindex -h@var{name}
578@kindex -soname=@var{name}
579@item -h@var{name}
580@itemx -soname=@var{name}
581When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
582the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
583which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
584linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
585field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
586
587@kindex -i
588@cindex incremental link
589@item -i
590Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
591
3dbf70a2
MM
592@cindex initialization function
593@kindex -init
594@item -init @var{name}
595When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
596executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
597of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
598function to call.
599
252b5132 600@cindex archive files, from cmd line
bcb674cf
RS
601@kindex -l@var{namespec}
602@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
603@item -l@var{namespec}
604@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
605Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
606list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
607If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
608will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherise it
609will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 610
ff5dcc92 611On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
612files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
613and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
614called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
615@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
616indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
617to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
618@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
619
620The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
621specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
622was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
623command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
624archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
625the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
626
ff5dcc92 627See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
628archives multiple times.
629
630You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
631
632@ifset GENERIC
633This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 634if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
635behaviour of the AIX linker.
636@end ifset
637
638@cindex search directory, from cmd line
639@kindex -L@var{dir}
640@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
a1ab1d2a 641@item -L@var{searchdir}
252b5132 642@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
643Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
644for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
645option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
646in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
647on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 648@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
252b5132
RH
649order in which the options appear.
650
9c8ebd6a
DJ
651If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
652by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
653
252b5132
RH
654@ifset UsesEnvVars
655The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 656@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
657some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
658@end ifset
659
660The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
661@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
662at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
663
664@cindex emulation
665@kindex -m @var{emulation}
666@item -m@var{emulation}
667Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
668emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
669
670If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
671@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
672
673Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
674configured.
675
676@cindex link map
677@kindex -M
678@kindex --print-map
679@item -M
680@itemx --print-map
681Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
682information about the link, including the following:
683
684@itemize @bullet
685@item
3b83e13a 686Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
687@item
688How common symbols are allocated.
689@item
690All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
691which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
692@item
693The values assigned to symbols.
694
695Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
696involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
697have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
698linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
699of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
700the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
701linker script containing:
702
703@smallexample
704 foo = 1
705 foo = foo * 4
706 foo = foo + 8
707@end smallexample
708
709will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
710option is used:
711
712@smallexample
713 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
714 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
715 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
716@end smallexample
717
718See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
719scripts.
252b5132
RH
720@end itemize
721
722@kindex -n
723@cindex read-only text
724@cindex NMAGIC
725@kindex --nmagic
726@item -n
727@itemx --nmagic
fa19fce0 728Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
a1ab1d2a 729@code{NMAGIC} if possible.
252b5132
RH
730
731@kindex -N
732@kindex --omagic
733@cindex read/write from cmd line
734@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 735@item -N
252b5132
RH
736@itemx --omagic
737Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
738not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
739libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
740mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
741is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
742specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
743
744@kindex --no-omagic
745@cindex OMAGIC
746@item --no-omagic
747This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
748sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
749be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
750shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
751
752@kindex -o @var{output}
753@kindex --output=@var{output}
754@cindex naming the output file
755@item -o @var{output}
756@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 757Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
758option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
759script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
760
761@kindex -O @var{level}
762@cindex generating optimized output
763@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 764If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 765the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
766should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
767option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
768the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
769no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
770of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 771
a712da20
NC
772@kindex -q
773@kindex --emit-relocs
774@cindex retain relocations in final executable
775@item -q
776@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 777Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
778Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
779order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
780in larger executables.
781
dbab7a7b
NC
782This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
783
4f471f39
RS
784@kindex --force-dynamic
785@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
786@item --force-dynamic
787Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
788to VxWorks targets.
789
252b5132
RH
790@cindex partial link
791@cindex relocatable output
792@kindex -r
1049f94e 793@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 794@item -r
1049f94e 795@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 796Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 797turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
798linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
799magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
800@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 801@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
802If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
803linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
804constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
805
62bf86b4
HPN
806When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
807partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
808relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
809example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
810with input files in other formats at all.
811
252b5132
RH
812This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
813
814@kindex -R @var{file}
815@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
816@cindex symbol-only input
817@item -R @var{filename}
818@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
819Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
820relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
821to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
822programs. You may use this option more than once.
823
ff5dcc92 824For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 825followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 826the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
827
828@kindex -s
829@kindex --strip-all
830@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 831@item -s
252b5132
RH
832@itemx --strip-all
833Omit all symbol information from the output file.
834
835@kindex -S
836@kindex --strip-debug
837@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 838@item -S
252b5132
RH
839@itemx --strip-debug
840Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
841
842@kindex -t
843@kindex --trace
844@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 845@item -t
252b5132 846@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 847Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
848
849@kindex -T @var{script}
850@kindex --script=@var{script}
851@cindex script files
852@item -T @var{scriptfile}
853@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
854Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 855@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 856@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
857output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
858the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
859specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
860options accumulate.
252b5132 861
14be8564
L
862@kindex -dT @var{script}
863@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
864@cindex script files
865@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
866@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
867Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
868
869This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
870processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
871command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
872@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
873behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
874command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
875the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
876@samp{gcc}).
877
252b5132
RH
878@kindex -u @var{symbol}
879@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
880@cindex undefined symbol
881@item -u @var{symbol}
882@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
883Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
884symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
885modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
886different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
887option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
888
889@kindex -Ur
890@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 891@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
892For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
893@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 894turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
895@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
896It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
897with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
898be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
899@samp{-r} for the others.
900
577a0623
AM
901@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
902@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
903Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
904@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
905missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
906specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
907multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
908input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
909in a linker script.
a854a4a7 910
252b5132
RH
911@kindex -v
912@kindex -V
913@kindex --version
914@cindex version
915@item -v
916@itemx --version
917@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 918Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
919lists the supported emulations.
920
921@kindex -x
922@kindex --discard-all
923@cindex deleting local symbols
924@item -x
925@itemx --discard-all
926Delete all local symbols.
927
928@kindex -X
929@kindex --discard-locals
930@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 931@item -X
252b5132 932@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
933Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
934system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
935or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
936
937@kindex -y @var{symbol}
938@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
939@cindex symbol tracing
940@item -y @var{symbol}
941@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
942Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
943option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
944to prepend an underscore.
945
946This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
947don't know where the reference is coming from.
948
949@kindex -Y @var{path}
950@item -Y @var{path}
951Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
952for Solaris compatibility.
953
954@kindex -z @var{keyword}
955@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
956The recognized keywords are:
957@table @samp
958
959@item combreloc
960Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
961lookup caching possible.
962
963@item defs
560e09e9 964Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 965shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 966
6aa29e7b
JJ
967@item execstack
968Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
969
cd6d6c15
NC
970@item initfirst
971This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
972It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
973before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
974the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
975the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
976objects.
977
978@item interpose
979Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
980but the primary executable.
981
5fa222e4
AM
982@item lazy
983When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
984dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
985the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
986Lazy binding is the default.
987
cd6d6c15
NC
988@item loadfltr
989Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
990runtime.
991
992@item muldefs
993Allows multiple definitions.
994
995@item nocombreloc
996Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
997
998@item nocopyreloc
999Disables production of copy relocs.
1000
1001@item nodefaultlib
1002Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1003ignore any default library search paths.
1004
1005@item nodelete
1006Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1007
1008@item nodlopen
1009Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1010
1011@item nodump
1012Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1013
6aa29e7b
JJ
1014@item noexecstack
1015Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1016
1017@item norelro
1018Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1019
cd6d6c15
NC
1020@item now
1021When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1022dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1023when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1024deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1025first called.
1026
1027@item origin
1028Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1029
6aa29e7b
JJ
1030@item relro
1031Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1032
24718e3b
L
1033@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1034Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1035
1036@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1037Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1038
cd6d6c15
NC
1039@end table
1040
ece2d90e 1041Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1042
1043@kindex -(
1044@cindex groups of archives
1045@item -( @var{archives} -)
1046@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1047The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1048either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1049
1050The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1051references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1052the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1053archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1054object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1055would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1056they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1057resolved.
1058
1059Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1060it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1061more archives.
1062
69da35b5
NC
1063@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1064@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1065@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1066@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1067Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1068recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1069and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1070the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1071behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1072so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1073restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1074
4a43e768
AM
1075@kindex --as-needed
1076@kindex --no-as-needed
1077@item --as-needed
1078@itemx --no-as-needed
1079This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1080on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally,
1081the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1082on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
77cfaee6
AM
1083needed. @option{--as-needed} causes DT_NEEDED tags to only be emitted
1084for libraries that satisfy some symbol reference from regular objects
1085which is undefined at the point that the library was linked.
4a43e768
AM
1086@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1087
e56f61be
L
1088@kindex --add-needed
1089@kindex --no-add-needed
1090@item --add-needed
1091@itemx --no-add-needed
1092This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries from ELF
1093DT_NEEDED tags in dynamic libraries mentioned on the command line after
1094the @option{--no-add-needed} option. Normally, the linker will add
1095a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library from DT_NEEDED tags.
1096@option{--no-add-needed} causes DT_NEEDED tags will never be emitted
1097for those libraries from DT_NEEDED tags. @option{--add-needed} restores
1098the default behaviour.
1099
252b5132
RH
1100@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1101@item -assert @var{keyword}
1102This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1103
1104@kindex -Bdynamic
1105@kindex -dy
1106@kindex -call_shared
1107@item -Bdynamic
1108@itemx -dy
1109@itemx -call_shared
1110Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1111for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1112default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1113for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1114multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1115@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1116
a1ab1d2a
UD
1117@kindex -Bgroup
1118@item -Bgroup
1119Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1120section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1121object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1122@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1123only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1124
252b5132
RH
1125@kindex -Bstatic
1126@kindex -dn
1127@kindex -non_shared
1128@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1129@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1130@itemx -dn
1131@itemx -non_shared
1132@itemx -static
1133Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1134platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1135variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1136may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1137library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1138option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1139option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1140shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1141references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1142libraries.
252b5132
RH
1143
1144@kindex -Bsymbolic
1145@item -Bsymbolic
1146When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1147definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1148for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1149within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1150platforms which support shared libraries.
1151
40b36307
L
1152@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1153@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1154When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1155symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1156This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1157libraries.
1158
55255dae
L
1159@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1160@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1161Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1162typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1163global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1164within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1165to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1166in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1167which support shared libraries.
1168
1169The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1170scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1171
40b36307
L
1172@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1173@item --dynamic-list-data
1174Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1175
1176@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1177@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1178Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1179is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1180
0b8a70d9
L
1181@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1182@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1183Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1184
252b5132
RH
1185@kindex --check-sections
1186@kindex --no-check-sections
1187@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1188@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1189Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1190been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1191perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1192suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1193allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1194restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
252b5132
RH
1195
1196@cindex cross reference table
1197@kindex --cref
1198@item --cref
1199Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1200generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1201Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1202
1203The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1204easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1205sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1206symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1207definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1208
4818e05f
AM
1209@cindex common allocation
1210@kindex --no-define-common
1211@item --no-define-common
1212This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1213The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1214@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1215
1216The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1217the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1218of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1219forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1220Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1221from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1222This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1223and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1224duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1225paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1226
252b5132
RH
1227@cindex symbols, from command line
1228@kindex --defsym @var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1229@item --defsym @var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1230Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1231address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1232times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1233limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1234context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1235symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1236constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1237using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1238Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1239space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1240@var{expression}.
1241
1242@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1243@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1244@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1245@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1246@itemx --no-demangle
1247These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1248and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1249present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1250underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1251mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1252different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1253to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1254demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1255is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1256
1257@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1258@kindex -I@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1259@kindex --dynamic-linker @var{file}
1260@item --dynamic-linker @var{file}
1261Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1262generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1263linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1264doing.
1265
7ce691ae 1266@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1267@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1268@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1269@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1270Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1271with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1272
252b5132
RH
1273@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1274@item --force-exe-suffix
1275Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1276
1277If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1278@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1279the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1280option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1281Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1282it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1283
1284@kindex --gc-sections
1285@kindex --no-gc-sections
1286@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1287@item --gc-sections
1288@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1289Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1290targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1291performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1292@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1293
d5465ba2
AM
1294@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1295examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1296symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1297command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1298referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1299libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1300referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1301the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1302relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1303
ac69cbc6
TG
1304This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1305@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitely
1306specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1307a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1308
c17d87de
NC
1309@kindex --print-gc-sections
1310@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1311@cindex garbage collection
1312@item --print-gc-sections
1313@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1314List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1315printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1316collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1317default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1318be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1319line.
1320
252b5132
RH
1321@cindex help
1322@cindex usage
1323@kindex --help
1324@item --help
1325Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1326
ea20a7da
CC
1327@kindex --target-help
1328@item --target-help
1329Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1330
252b5132
RH
1331@kindex -Map
1332@item -Map @var{mapfile}
1333Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1334@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1335
1336@cindex memory usage
1337@kindex --no-keep-memory
1338@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1339@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1340symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1341instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1342necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1343while linking a large executable.
1344
1345@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1346@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1347@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1348@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1349Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1350is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1351The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1352behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1353libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1354
aa713662
L
1355@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1356@kindex -z muldefs
1357@item --allow-multiple-definition
1358@itemx -z muldefs
1359Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1360report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1361first definition will be used.
1362
b79e8c78 1363@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1364@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1365@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1366@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
560e09e9
NC
1367Allows (the default) or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1368This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1369determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1370shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1371how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1372
1373The reason that @option{--allow-shlib-undefined} is the default is that
1374the shared library being specified at link time may not be the same as
1375the one that is available at load time, so the symbols might actually be
ae9a127f 1376resolvable at load time. Plus there are some systems, (eg BeOS) where
560e09e9 1377undefined symbols in shared libraries is normal. (The kernel patches
ece2d90e 1378them at load time to select which function is most appropriate
560e09e9
NC
1379for the current architecture. This is used for example to dynamically
1380select an appropriate memset function). Apparently it is also normal
1381for HPPA shared libraries to have undefined symbols.
b79e8c78 1382
31941635
L
1383@kindex --no-undefined-version
1384@item --no-undefined-version
1385Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1386it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1387will be issued instead.
1388
3e3b46e5
PB
1389@kindex --default-symver
1390@item --default-symver
1391Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1392exported symbols.
1393
1394@kindex --default-imported-symver
1395@item --default-imported-symver
1396Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1397imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1398
252b5132
RH
1399@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1400@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1401Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1402files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1403been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1404This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1405errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1406have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1407inappropriate.
1408
fe7929ce
AM
1409@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1410@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1411Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1412library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1413
252b5132
RH
1414@kindex --no-whole-archive
1415@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1416Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1417archive files.
1418
1419@cindex output file after errors
1420@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1421@item --noinhibit-exec
1422Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1423Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1424errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1425when it issues any error whatsoever.
1426
0a9c1c8e
CD
1427@kindex -nostdlib
1428@item -nostdlib
1429Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1430command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1431(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1432
252b5132
RH
1433@ifclear SingleFormat
1434@kindex --oformat
1435@item --oformat @var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1436@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1437file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1438@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1439object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1440object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1441should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1442usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1443name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1444list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1445command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1446this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1447@end ifclear
1448
36af4a4e
JJ
1449@kindex -pie
1450@kindex --pic-executable
1451@item -pie
1452@itemx --pic-executable
1453@cindex position independent executables
1454Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1455ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1456libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1457address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1458normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1459defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1460
252b5132
RH
1461@kindex -qmagic
1462@item -qmagic
1463This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1464
1465@kindex -Qy
1466@item -Qy
1467This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1468
1469@kindex --relax
1470@cindex synthesizing linker
1471@cindex relaxing addressing modes
1472@item --relax
a1ab1d2a 1473An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1474@ifset GENERIC
1475This option is only supported on a few targets.
1476@end ifset
1477@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1478@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1479@end ifset
1480@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1481@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1482@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1483@ifset XTENSA
1484@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1485@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1486@ifset M68HC11
1487@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1488@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1489@ifset POWERPC
1490@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1491@end ifset
252b5132
RH
1492
1493On some platforms, the @samp{--relax} option performs global
1494optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves addressing
1495in the program, such as relaxing address modes and synthesizing new
1496instructions in the output object file.
1497
1498On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1499debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1500@ifset GENERIC
1501This is known to be
1502the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300 family of processors.
1503@end ifset
1504
1505@ifset GENERIC
1506On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1507but ignored.
1508@end ifset
1509
1510@cindex retaining specified symbols
1511@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1512@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1513@item --retain-symbols-file @var{filename}
1514Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1515discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1516symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1517@ifset GENERIC
1518(such as VxWorks)
1519@end ifset
1520where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1521run-time memory.
1522
1523@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1524or symbols needed for relocations.
1525
1526You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1527line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1528
1529@ifset GENERIC
1530@item -rpath @var{dir}
1531@cindex runtime library search path
1532@kindex -rpath
1533Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1534linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1535arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1536them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1537also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1538objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1539@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1540ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1541@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1542
ff5dcc92 1543The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1544SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1545@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1546runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1547options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1548gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1549file systems.
252b5132 1550
ff5dcc92 1551For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1552followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1553the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1554@end ifset
1555
1556@ifset GENERIC
1557@cindex link-time runtime library search path
1558@kindex -rpath-link
1559@item -rpath-link @var{DIR}
1560When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1561happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1562of the input files.
1563
1564When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1565non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1566shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1567explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1568specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1569@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1570either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1571appearing multiple times.
1572
28c309a2
NC
1573This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1574that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1575is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1576runtime linker would do.
1577
252b5132 1578The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1579libraries:
252b5132
RH
1580@enumerate
1581@item
ff5dcc92 1582Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1583@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1584Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1585between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1586specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1587used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1588at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1589by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1590the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1591@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1592On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1593@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1594environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1595@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1596On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1597directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1598@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1599For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1600variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1601@item
ec4eb78a
L
1602For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1603@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1604libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1605@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1606@item
252b5132
RH
1607The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1608@item
1609For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1610exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1611@end enumerate
1612
1613If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1614warning and continue with the link.
1615@end ifset
1616
1617@kindex -shared
1618@kindex -Bshareable
1619@item -shared
1620@itemx -Bshareable
1621@cindex shared libraries
1622Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1623and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1624shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1625undefined symbols in the link.
1626
de7dd2bd 1627@item --sort-common [= ascending | descending]
252b5132 1628@kindex --sort-common
de7dd2bd
NC
1629This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1630ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1631sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1632eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1633between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1634specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1635
bcaa7b3e
L
1636@kindex --sort-section name
1637@item --sort-section name
1638This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1639patterns in the linker script.
1640
1641@kindex --sort-section alignment
1642@item --sort-section alignment
1643This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1644patterns in the linker script.
1645
252b5132 1646@kindex --split-by-file
a854a4a7 1647@item --split-by-file [@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1648Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1649each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1650size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1651
1652@kindex --split-by-reloc
a854a4a7
AM
1653@item --split-by-reloc [@var{count}]
1654Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1655output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1656This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1657certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1658cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1659that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1660support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1661input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1662more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1663many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1664
1665@kindex --stats
1666@item --stats
1667Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1668as execution time and memory usage.
1669
e2243057
RS
1670@kindex --sysroot
1671@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1672Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1673configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1674that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1675
252b5132
RH
1676@kindex --traditional-format
1677@cindex traditional format
1678@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1679For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1680the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1681use the traditional format instead.
1682
1683@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1684For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1685symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1686full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1687@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1688trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1689combine duplicate entries.
1690
176355da
NC
1691@kindex --section-start @var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1692@item --section-start @var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1693Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1694address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1695times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1696line.
1697@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1698for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1699@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1700should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1701sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1702
252b5132
RH
1703@kindex -Tbss @var{org}
1704@kindex -Tdata @var{org}
1705@kindex -Ttext @var{org}
1706@cindex segment origins, cmd line
1707@item -Tbss @var{org}
1708@itemx -Tdata @var{org}
1709@itemx -Ttext @var{org}
a6e02871
AO
1710Same as --section-start, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1711@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1712
560e09e9
NC
1713@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1714@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1715Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1716values for @samp{method}:
1717
1718@table @samp
1719@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1720Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1721
1722@item report-all
da8bce14 1723Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1724
1725@item ignore-in-object-files
1726Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1727ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1728
1729@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1730Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1731ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1732when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1733libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1734command line.
1735@end table
1736
1737The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1738by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1739
1740Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1741unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1742can change this to a warning.
1743
252b5132
RH
1744@kindex --verbose
1745@cindex verbose
1746@item --dll-verbose
308b1ffd 1747@itemx --verbose
ff5dcc92 1748Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1749supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
b9a8de1e 1750the linker script being used by the linker.
252b5132
RH
1751
1752@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1753@cindex version script, symbol versions
1754@itemx --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1755Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1756used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1757about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
252b5132
RH
1758is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1759@xref{VERSION}.
1760
7ce691ae 1761@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1762@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1763@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1764@item --warn-common
1765Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1766a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1767but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1768you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1769Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1770warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1771
1772There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1773
1774@table @samp
1775@item int i = 1;
1776A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1777file.
1778
1779@item extern int i;
1780An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1781There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1782variable somewhere.
1783
1784@item int i;
1785A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1786variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1787The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1788single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1789size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1790a definition of the same variable.
1791@end table
1792
1793The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1794Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1795just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1796encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1797a common symbol.
1798
1799@enumerate
1800@item
1801Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1802definition for the symbol.
1803@smallexample
1804@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1805 overridden by definition
1806@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1807@end smallexample
1808
1809@item
1810Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1811the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1812except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1813@smallexample
1814@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1815 overriding common
1816@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1817@end smallexample
1818
1819@item
1820Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1821@smallexample
1822@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1823 of `@var{symbol}'
1824@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1825@end smallexample
1826
1827@item
1828Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1829@smallexample
1830@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1831 overridden by larger common
1832@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1833@end smallexample
1834
1835@item
1836Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1837the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1838encountered in a different order.
1839@smallexample
1840@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1841 overriding smaller common
1842@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1843@end smallexample
1844@end enumerate
1845
1846@kindex --warn-constructors
1847@item --warn-constructors
1848Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1849object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1850detect the use of global constructors.
1851
1852@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1853@item --warn-multiple-gp
1854Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1855This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1856Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1857section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1858of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1859base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1860base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1861bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1862large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1863values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1864option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1865
1866@kindex --warn-once
1867@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1868@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1869@item --warn-once
1870Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1871which refers to it.
1872
1873@kindex --warn-section-align
1874@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1875@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1876@item --warn-section-align
1877Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1878alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1879The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1880is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1881the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1882
8fdd7217
NC
1883@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1884@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 1885Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 1886
560e09e9
NC
1887@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
1888@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
1889If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
1890@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
1891This option makes it generate a warning instead.
1892
1893@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
1894@item --error-unresolved-symbols
1895This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
1896it is reporting unresolved symbols.
1897
252b5132
RH
1898@kindex --whole-archive
1899@cindex including an entire archive
1900@item --whole-archive
1901For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 1902@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
1903in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
1904files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
1905library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
1906library. This option may be used more than once.
1907
7ec229ce 1908Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
1909about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
1910Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
1911list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
1912your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
1913
252b5132
RH
1914@kindex --wrap
1915@item --wrap @var{symbol}
1916Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
1917@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
1918undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
1919@var{symbol}.
1920
1921This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
1922wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
1923wishes to call the system function, it should call
1924@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
1925
1926Here is a trivial example:
1927
1928@smallexample
1929void *
cc2f008e 1930__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 1931@{
cc2f008e 1932 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
1933 return __real_malloc (c);
1934@}
1935@end smallexample
1936
ff5dcc92 1937If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
1938all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
1939instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
1940call the real @code{malloc} function.
1941
1942You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 1943links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
1944you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
1945file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
1946call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
1947
6aa29e7b
JJ
1948@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
1949@item --eh-frame-hdr
1950Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
1951@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
1952
6c1439be
L
1953@kindex --enable-new-dtags
1954@kindex --disable-new-dtags
1955@item --enable-new-dtags
1956@itemx --disable-new-dtags
1957This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
1958systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
1959@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
1960If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
1961created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
1962those options are only available for ELF systems.
1963
2d643429 1964@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 1965@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
1966Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
1967close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
1968time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
1969increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
1970value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
1971
fdc90cb4
JJ
1972@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
1973@item --hash-style=@var{style}
1974Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
1975@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
1976new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
1977the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
1978hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
1979
35835446
JR
1980@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
1981@item --reduce-memory-overheads
1982This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 1983linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 1984for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
1985about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
1986
4f9c04f7 1987Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 19881021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 1989run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
1990has been used.
1991
1992The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
1993enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 1994
c0065db7
RM
1995@kindex --build-id
1996@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
1997@item --build-id
1998@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
1999Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2000The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2001file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2002@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2003parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2004@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2005@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2006an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2007characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2008omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2009
2010The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2011that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2012unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2013to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2014file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2015string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2016
2017Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2018@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2019@end table
2020
0285c67d
NC
2021@c man end
2022
36f63dca 2023@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2024
0285c67d
NC
2025@c man begin OPTIONS
2026
ff5dcc92 2027The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2028the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2029normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2030use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2031@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2032like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2033symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2034object file).
2035
2036In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2037support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2038PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2039values by either a space or an equals sign.
2040
ff5dcc92 2041@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2042
2043@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2044@item --add-stdcall-alias
2045If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2046as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2047[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2048
2049@kindex --base-file
2050@item --base-file @var{file}
2051Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2052addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2053@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2054[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2055
2056@kindex --dll
2057@item --dll
2058Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2059@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2060file.
bb10df36 2061[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2062
2063@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2064@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2065@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2066@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2067If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2068do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2069only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2070resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2071undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2072@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2073to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2074warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2075import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2076to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2077feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2078@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2079mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2080[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2081
2082@cindex DLLs, creating
2083@kindex --export-all-symbols
2084@item --export-all-symbols
2085If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2086be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2087otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2088explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2089attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2090option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2091@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2092@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2093exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2094re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2095such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2096@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2097@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2098Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2099not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2100extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2101(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2102These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2103@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2104@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2105@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2106@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2107[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2108
2109@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2110@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2111Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2112exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2113[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2114
2115@kindex --file-alignment
2116@item --file-alignment
2117Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2118file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2119512.
bb10df36 2120[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2121
2122@cindex heap size
2123@kindex --heap
2124@item --heap @var{reserve}
2125@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2126Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2127to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2128committed.
bb10df36 2129[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2130
2131@cindex image base
2132@kindex --image-base
2133@item --image-base @var{value}
2134Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2135the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2136is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2137your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2138other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2139for dlls.
bb10df36 2140[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2141
2142@kindex --kill-at
2143@item --kill-at
2144If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2145symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2146[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2147
26d2d8a2
BF
2148@kindex --large-address-aware
2149@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2150If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2151header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2152greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2153or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2154section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2155[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2156
252b5132
RH
2157@kindex --major-image-version
2158@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2159Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2160[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2161
2162@kindex --major-os-version
2163@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2164Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2165[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2166
2167@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2168@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2169Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2170[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2171
2172@kindex --minor-image-version
2173@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2174Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2175[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2176
2177@kindex --minor-os-version
2178@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2179Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2180[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2181
2182@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2183@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2184Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2185[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2186
2187@cindex DEF files, creating
2188@cindex DLLs, creating
2189@kindex --output-def
2190@item --output-def @var{file}
2191The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2192file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2193(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2194library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2195automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2196[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2197
b044cda1
CW
2198@cindex DLLs, creating
2199@kindex --out-implib
2200@item --out-implib @var{file}
2201The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2202import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2203import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2204may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2205makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2206creation step.
bb10df36 2207[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2208
2209@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2210@item --enable-auto-image-base
2211Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2212using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2213from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2214collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2215avoided.
bb10df36 2216[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2217
2218@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2219@item --disable-auto-image-base
2220Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2221user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2222default.
bb10df36 2223[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2224
2225@cindex DLLs, linking to
2226@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2227@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2228When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2229search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2230@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2231between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2232uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2233@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2234[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2235
2236@kindex --enable-auto-import
2237@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2238Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2239DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2240building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2241'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2242to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2243specification published by Microsoft.
2244
e2a83dd0
NC
2245Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2246data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2247placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2248around a problem with consts that is described here:
2249http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2250
4d8907ac
DS
2251Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2252see this message:
0d888aac 2253
ece2d90e 2254"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2255documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2256
ece2d90e
NC
2257This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2258ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2259allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2260fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2261constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2262multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2263this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2264of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2265the warning, and exit.
2266
2267There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2268data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2269
2fa9fc65
NC
2270One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2271of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2272this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2273
c0065db7
RM
2274A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2275that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2276there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2277a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2278
2279@example
2280extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2281extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2282 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2283@end example
2284
2285or
2286
2287@example
2288extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2289extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2290 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2291@end example
2292
c0065db7 2293For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2294is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2295
2296@example
2297extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2298extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2299 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2300@end example
2301
c406afaf
NC
2302or
2303
2304@example
2305extern long long extern_ll;
2306extern_ll -->
2307 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2308@end example
2309
2fa9fc65 2310A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2311'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2312@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2313requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2314building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2315merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2316between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2317constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2318
2319Original:
2320@example
2321--foo.h
2322extern int arr[];
2323--foo.c
2324#include "foo.h"
2325void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2326 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2327@}
2328@end example
2329
2330Solution 1:
2331@example
2332--foo.h
2333extern int arr[];
2334--foo.c
2335#include "foo.h"
2336void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2337 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2338 volatile int *parr = arr;
2339 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2340@}
2341@end example
2342
2343Solution 2:
2344@example
2345--foo.h
2346/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2347#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2348 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2349#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2350#else
2351#define FOO_IMPORT
2352#endif
2353extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2354--foo.c
2355#include "foo.h"
2356void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2357 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2358@}
2359@end example
2360
c0065db7 2361A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2362library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2363for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2364functions).
bb10df36 2365[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2366
2367@kindex --disable-auto-import
2368@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2369Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2370@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2371[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2372
2fa9fc65
NC
2373@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2374@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2375If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2376that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2377a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2378environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2379[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2380
2381@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2382@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2383Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2384DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2385[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2386
b044cda1
CW
2387@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2388@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2389Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2390[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2391
252b5132
RH
2392@kindex --section-alignment
2393@item --section-alignment
2394Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2395addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2396[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2397
2398@cindex stack size
2399@kindex --stack
2400@item --stack @var{reserve}
2401@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2402Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2403to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2404committed.
bb10df36 2405[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2406
2407@kindex --subsystem
2408@item --subsystem @var{which}
2409@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2410@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2411Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2412legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2413@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2414the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2415@var{which}.
bb10df36 2416[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2417
2418@end table
2419
0285c67d
NC
2420@c man end
2421
93fd0973
SC
2422@ifset M68HC11
2423@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2424
2425@c man begin OPTIONS
2426
2427The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2428memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2429
2430@table @gcctabopt
2431
2432@kindex --no-trampoline
2433@item --no-trampoline
2434This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2435is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2436instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2437
2438@kindex --bank-window
2439@item --bank-window @var{name}
2440This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2441the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2442The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2443paging and addresses within the memory window.
2444
2445@end table
2446
2447@c man end
2448@end ifset
2449
7fb9f789
NC
2450@ifset M68K
2451@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2452
2453@c man begin OPTIONS
2454
2455The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2456when linking for 68K targets.
2457
2458@table @gcctabopt
2459
2460@kindex --got
2461@item --got=@var{type}
2462This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2463@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2464@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2465Info entry for @file{ld}.
2466
2467@end table
2468
2469@c man end
2470@end ifset
2471
252b5132
RH
2472@ifset UsesEnvVars
2473@node Environment
2474@section Environment Variables
2475
0285c67d
NC
2476@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2477
560e09e9 2478You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2479@ifclear SingleFormat
2480@code{GNUTARGET},
2481@end ifclear
2482@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2483
36f63dca 2484@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2485@kindex GNUTARGET
2486@cindex default input format
2487@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2488use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2489of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2490@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2491of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2492attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2493this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2494there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2495object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2496BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2497in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2498@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2499
2500@kindex LDEMULATION
2501@cindex default emulation
2502@cindex emulation, default
2503@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2504@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2505behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2506available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2507the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2508variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2509linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2510
2511@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2512@cindex demangling, default
2513Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2514@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2515default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2516a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2517may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2518options.
2519
0285c67d
NC
2520@c man end
2521@end ifset
2522
252b5132
RH
2523@node Scripts
2524@chapter Linker Scripts
2525
2526@cindex scripts
2527@cindex linker scripts
2528@cindex command files
2529Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2530written in the linker command language.
2531
2532The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2533the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2534the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2535more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2536direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2537described below.
2538
2539The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2540yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2541linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2542to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2543such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2544
2545You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2546line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2547default linker script.
2548
2549You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2550to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2551Linker Scripts}.
2552
2553@menu
2554* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2555* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2556* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2557* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2558* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2559* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2560* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2561* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2562* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2563* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2564* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2565@end menu
2566
2567@node Basic Script Concepts
2568@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2569@cindex linker script concepts
2570We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2571describe the linker script language.
2572
2573The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2574file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2575@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2576The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2577purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2578among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2579section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2580in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2581
2582Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2583also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2584contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2585the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2586A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2587area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2588loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2589which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2590of debugging information.
2591
2592Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2593first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2594the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2595@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2596section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2597same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2598is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2599(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2600based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2601RAM address would be the VMA.
2602
2603You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2604program with the @samp{-h} option.
2605
2606Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2607@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2608has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2609information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2610will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2611static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2612referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2613
2614You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2615program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2616option.
2617
2618@node Script Format
2619@section Linker Script Format
2620@cindex linker script format
2621Linker scripts are text files.
2622
2623You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2624either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2625symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2626generally ignored.
2627
2628Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2629If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2630otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2631double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2632file name.
2633
2634You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2635@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2636to whitespace.
2637
2638@node Simple Example
2639@section Simple Linker Script Example
2640@cindex linker script example
2641@cindex example of linker script
2642Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2643
2644The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2645@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2646memory layout of the output file.
2647
2648The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2649describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2650code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2651@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2652Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2653your input files.
2654
2655For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
26560x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2657linker script which will do that:
2658@smallexample
2659SECTIONS
2660@{
2661 . = 0x10000;
2662 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2663 . = 0x8000000;
2664 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2665 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2666@}
2667@end smallexample
2668
2669You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2670followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2671descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2672
252b5132
RH
2673The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2674sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2675counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2676other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2677current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2678incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2679@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2680
2681The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2682required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2683after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2684which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2685wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2686means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2687
2688Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2689@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2690@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2691
2692The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2693the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2694at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2695output section, the value of the location counter will be
2696@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2697effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2698immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2699
2700The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2701alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2702example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2703sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2704may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2705sections.
2706
2707That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2708
2709@node Simple Commands
2710@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2711@cindex linker script simple commands
2712In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2713
2714@menu
2715* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2716* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2717@ifclear SingleFormat
2718* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2719@end ifclear
2720
2721* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2722@end menu
2723
2724@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2725@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2726@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2727@cindex start of execution
2728@cindex first instruction
2729@cindex entry point
2730The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2731point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2732entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2733@smallexample
2734ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2735@end smallexample
2736
2737There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2738entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2739stopping when one of them succeeds:
2740@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2741@item
252b5132 2742the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2743@item
252b5132 2744the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2745@item
252b5132 2746the value of the symbol @code{start}, if defined;
a1ab1d2a 2747@item
252b5132 2748the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2749@item
252b5132
RH
2750The address @code{0}.
2751@end itemize
2752
2753@node File Commands
36f63dca 2754@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2755@cindex linker script file commands
2756Several linker script commands deal with files.
2757
2758@table @code
2759@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2760@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2761@cindex including a linker script
2762Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2763be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 2764with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
276510 levels deep.
2766
4006703d
NS
2767You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
2768@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
2769
252b5132
RH
2770@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2771@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2772@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2773@cindex input files in linker scripts
2774@cindex input object files in linker scripts
2775@cindex linker script input object files
2776The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
2777in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2778
2779For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
2780a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
2781then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
2782
2783In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
2784script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
2785
e3f2db7f
AO
2786In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
2787with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
2788located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
2789for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
2790open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
2791linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
2792description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 2793
ff5dcc92 2794If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
2795name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
2796@samp{-l}.
2797
2798When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
2799files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2800script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
2801
2802@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2803@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2804@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
2805@cindex grouping input files
2806The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
2807files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
2808new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
2809in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
2810
b717d30e
JJ
2811@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2812@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2813@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
2814This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
2815commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
2816as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
2817with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
2818when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
2819@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
2820and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
2821setting afterwards.
2822
252b5132
RH
2823@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
2824@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 2825@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
2826The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
2827@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
2828@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
2829Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
2830precedence.
2831
2832You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
2833output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
2834
2835@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2836@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2837@cindex library search path in linker script
2838@cindex archive search path in linker script
2839@cindex search path in linker script
2840The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 2841@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
2842@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
2843on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
2844are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
2845the command line option are searched first.
2846
2847@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
2848@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
2849@cindex first input file
2850The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
2851that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
2852though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
2853when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
2854first file.
2855@end table
2856
2857@ifclear SingleFormat
2858@node Format Commands
36f63dca 2859@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
2860A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
2861
2862@table @code
2863@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2864@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
2865@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2866@cindex output file format in linker script
2867The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
2868output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 2869exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
2870(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
2871line option takes precedence.
2872
2873You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
2874formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
2875This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
2876desired endianness.
2877
2878If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
2879will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
2880output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
2881used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
2882
2883For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
2884command:
2885@smallexample
2886OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
2887@end smallexample
2888This says that the default format for the output file is
2889@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
2890option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
2891format.
2892
2893@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
2894@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
2895@cindex input file format in linker script
2896The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
2897files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
2898This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
2899(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
2900is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
2901command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
2902@end table
2903@end ifclear
2904
2905@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 2906@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
2907There are a few other linker scripts commands.
2908
2909@table @code
2910@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
2911@kindex ASSERT
2912@cindex assertion in linker script
2913Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
2914with an error code, and print @var{message}.
2915
2916@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
2917@kindex EXTERN
2918@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
2919Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
2920symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
2921modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
2922each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
2923command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
2924
2925@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2926@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2927@cindex common allocation in linker script
2928This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 2929to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
2930output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
2931
4818e05f
AM
2932@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2933@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2934@cindex common allocation in linker script
2935This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
2936command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
2937to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
2938
53d25da6
AM
2939@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
2940@kindex INSERT
2941@cindex insert user script into default script
2942This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
2943augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
2944inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
2945@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
2946default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
2947sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
2948linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
2949insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
2950linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
2951default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
2952of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
2953to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
2954is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
2955
2956@smallexample
2957SECTIONS
2958@{
2959 OVERLAY :
2960 @{
2961 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
2962 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
2963 @}
2964@}
2965INSERT AFTER .text;
2966@end smallexample
2967
252b5132
RH
2968@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
2969@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
2970@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 2971This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
2972references among certain output sections.
2973
2974In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
2975using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
2976will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
2977errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
2978a function defined in the other section.
2979
2980The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 2981@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
2982an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
2983@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
2984names.
2985
2986@ifclear SingleFormat
2987@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
2988@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
2989@cindex machine architecture
2990@cindex architecture
2991Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
2992of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
2993architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
2994the @samp{-f} option.
2995@end ifclear
2996@end table
2997
2998@node Assignments
2999@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3000@cindex assignment in scripts
3001@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3002@cindex variables, defining
3003You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3004the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3005
3006@menu
3007* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3008* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3009* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3010* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3011@end menu
3012
3013@node Simple Assignments
3014@subsection Simple Assignments
3015
3016You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3017
3018@table @code
3019@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3020@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3021@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3022@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3023@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3024@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3025@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3026@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3027@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3028@end table
3029
3030The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3031@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3032defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3033
3034The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3035may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3036
3037The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3038
3039Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3040
3041You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3042statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3043section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3044
3045The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3046expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3047
3048Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3049assignments may be used:
3050
3051@smallexample
3052floating_point = 0;
3053SECTIONS
3054@{
3055 .text :
3056 @{
3057 *(.text)
3058 _etext = .;
3059 @}
156e34dd 3060 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3061 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3062@}
3063@end smallexample
3064@noindent
3065In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3066zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3067the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3068defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3069upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3070
3071@node PROVIDE
3072@subsection PROVIDE
3073@cindex PROVIDE
3074In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3075only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3076the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3077@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3078@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3079@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3080@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3081@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3082
3083Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3084@smallexample
3085SECTIONS
3086@{
3087 .text :
3088 @{
3089 *(.text)
3090 _etext = .;
3091 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3092 @}
3093@}
3094@end smallexample
3095
3096In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3097underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3098the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3099underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3100If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3101linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3102
7af8e998
L
3103@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3104@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3105@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3106Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3107hidden and won't be exported.
3108
73ae6183
NC
3109@node Source Code Reference
3110@subsection Source Code Reference
3111
3112Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3113intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3114a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3115symbol that does not have a value.
3116
3117Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3118transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3119stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3120prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3121mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3122of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3123variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3124linker script variable might be referred to as:
3125
3126@smallexample
3127 extern int foo;
3128@end smallexample
3129
3130But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3131
3132@smallexample
3133 _foo = 1000;
3134@end smallexample
3135
3136In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3137transformation has taken place.
3138
3139When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3140things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3141in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3142second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3143table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3144contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3145value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3146
3147@smallexample
3148 int foo = 1000;
3149@end smallexample
3150
3151creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3152holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3153number 1000 is initially stored.
3154
3155When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3156first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3157memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3158So:
3159
3160@smallexample
3161 foo = 1;
3162@end smallexample
3163
3164looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3165associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3166address. Whereas:
3167
3168@smallexample
3169 int * a = & foo;
3170@end smallexample
3171
3172looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3173and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3174the variable @samp{a}.
3175
3176Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3177the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3178an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3179
3180@smallexample
3181 foo = 1000;
3182@end smallexample
3183
3184creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3185the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3186address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3187linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3188access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3189
3190Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3191you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3192use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3193section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3194linker script contains these declarations:
3195
3196@smallexample
3197@group
3198 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3199 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3200 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3201@end group
3202@end smallexample
3203
3204Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3205
3206@smallexample
3207@group
3208 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3209
73ae6183
NC
3210 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3211@end group
3212@end smallexample
3213
3214Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3215
252b5132 3216@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3217@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3218@kindex SECTIONS
3219The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3220into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3221
3222The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3223@smallexample
3224SECTIONS
3225@{
3226 @var{sections-command}
3227 @var{sections-command}
3228 @dots{}
3229@}
3230@end smallexample
3231
3232Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3233
3234@itemize @bullet
3235@item
3236an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3237@item
3238a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3239@item
3240an output section description
3241@item
3242an overlay description
3243@end itemize
3244
3245The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3246@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3247those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3248understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3249the layout of the output file.
3250
3251Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3252below.
3253
3254If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3255linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3256section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3257input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3258example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3259in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3260
3261@menu
3262* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3263* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3264* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3265* Input Section:: Input section description
3266* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3267* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3268* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3269* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3270* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3271@end menu
3272
3273@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3274@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3275The full description of an output section looks like this:
3276@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3277@group
7e7d5768 3278@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
bbf115d3 3279 [AT(@var{lma})] [ALIGN(@var{section_align})] [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
252b5132
RH
3280 @{
3281 @var{output-section-command}
3282 @var{output-section-command}
3283 @dots{}
562d3460 3284 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3285@end group
3286@end smallexample
3287
3288Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3289
3290The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3291name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3292The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3293
3294Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3295
3296@itemize @bullet
3297@item
3298a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3299@item
3300an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3301@item
3302data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3303@item
3304a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3305@end itemize
3306
3307@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3308@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3309@cindex name, section
3310@cindex section name
3311The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3312meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3313support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3314must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3315example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3316output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3317names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3318quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3319characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3320commas must be quoted.
3321
3322The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3323Discarding}.
3324
3325@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3326@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3327@cindex address, section
3328@cindex section address
3329The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3330address) of the output section. If you do not provide @var{address},
3331the linker will set it based on @var{region} if present, or otherwise
3332based on the current value of the location counter.
3333
3334If you provide @var{address}, the address of the output section will be
3335set to precisely that. If you provide neither @var{address} nor
3336@var{region}, then the address of the output section will be set to the
3337current value of the location counter aligned to the alignment
3338requirements of the output section. The alignment requirement of the
3339output section is the strictest alignment of any input section contained
3340within the output section.
3341
3342For example,
3343@smallexample
3344.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3345@end smallexample
3346@noindent
3347and
3348@smallexample
3349.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3350@end smallexample
3351@noindent
3352are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3353@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3354counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3355counter aligned to the strictest alignment of a @samp{.text} input
3356section.
3357
3358The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3359For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3360so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3361do something like this:
3362@smallexample
3363.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3364@end smallexample
3365@noindent
3366This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3367aligned upward to the specified value.
3368
3369Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
3370location counter.
3371
3372@node Input Section
36f63dca 3373@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3374@cindex input sections
3375@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3376The most common output section command is an input section description.
3377
3378The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3379You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3380in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3381map the input files into your memory layout.
3382
3383@menu
3384* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3385* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3386* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3387* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3388* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3389@end menu
3390
3391@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3392@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3393@cindex input section basics
3394An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3395by a list of section names in parentheses.
3396
3397The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3398describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3399
3400The most common input section description is to include all input
3401sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3402include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3403@smallexample
3404*(.text)
3405@end smallexample
3406@noindent
18625d54
CM
3407Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3408of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3409match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3410example:
252b5132 3411@smallexample
b4346c09 3412*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3413@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3414will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3415@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3416
3417There are two ways to include more than one section:
3418@smallexample
3419*(.text .rdata)
3420*(.text) *(.rdata)
3421@end smallexample
3422@noindent
3423The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3424@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3425first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3426they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3427@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3428@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3429
3430You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3431You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3432needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3433@smallexample
3434data.o(.data)
3435@end smallexample
3436
967928e9
AM
3437You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3438matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3439with no whitespace around the colon.
3440
3441@table @samp
3442@item archive:file
3443matches file within archive
3444@item archive:
3445matches the whole archive
3446@item :file
3447matches file but not one in an archive
3448@end table
3449
3450Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3451wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3452single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3453@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3454within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3455also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3456other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3457from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3458command.
3459
252b5132
RH
3460If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3461the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3462commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3463@smallexample
3464data.o
3465@end smallexample
3466
967928e9
AM
3467When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3468and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3469characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3470name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3471did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3472though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3473@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3474the archive search path.
3475
3476@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3477@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3478@cindex input section wildcards
3479@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3480@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3481@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3482In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3483name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3484
3485The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3486pattern for the file name.
3487
3488The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3489
3490@table @samp
3491@item *
3492matches any number of characters
3493@item ?
3494matches any single character
3495@item [@var{chars}]
3496matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3497character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3498@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3499@item \
3500quotes the following character
3501@end table
3502
3503When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3504will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3505Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3506exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3507@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3508a @samp{/} character.
3509
3510File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3511specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3512does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3513
3514If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3515appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3516will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3517sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3518@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3519@smallexample
3520.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3521.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3522@end smallexample
3523
bcaa7b3e 3524@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
3525Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3526in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
3527this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3528pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3529@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
3530into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3531
bcaa7b3e
L
3532@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3533@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3534difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3535ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3536
3537@cindex SORT
3538@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3539
3540When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3541can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3542
3543@enumerate
3544@item
3545@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3546It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3547sections have the same name.
3548@item
3549@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3550It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3551sections have the same alignment.
3552@item
c0065db7 3553@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
3554treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3555@item
3556@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3557is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3558@item
3559All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3560@end enumerate
3561
3562When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3563section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3564takes precedence over the command line option.
3565
3566If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3567command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3568treated as nested sorting command.
3569
3570@enumerate
3571@item
3572@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3573@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3574@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3575@item
3576@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3577@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3578@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3579@end enumerate
3580
3581If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3582command line option will be ignored.
3583
252b5132
RH
3584If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
3585@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
3586precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3587
3588This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3589files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
3590sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
3591The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
3592with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
3593linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
3594@smallexample
3595@group
3596SECTIONS @{
3597 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3598 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
3599 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3600 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3601@}
3602@end group
3603@end smallexample
3604
3605@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 3606@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
3607@cindex common symbol placement
3608@cindex uninitialized data placement
3609A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
3610file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
3611linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
3612named @samp{COMMON}.
3613
3614You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
3615other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
3616particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
3617input files are placed in another section.
3618
3619In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
3620@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
3621@smallexample
3622.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
3623@end smallexample
3624
3625@cindex scommon section
3626@cindex small common symbols
3627Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
3628example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
3629symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
3630different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
3631the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
3632symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
3633to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
3634locations.
3635
3636@cindex [COMMON]
3637You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
3638notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
3639@samp{*(COMMON)}.
3640
3641@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 3642@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
3643@cindex KEEP
3644@cindex garbage collection
3645When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 3646it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
3647This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
3648with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 3649@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
3650
3651@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 3652@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
3653The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
3654to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
3655start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
3656@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
3657follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
3658@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
3659@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
3660All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
3661files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
3662
3663@smallexample
3664@group
3665SECTIONS @{
3666 outputa 0x10000 :
3667 @{
3668 all.o
3669 foo.o (.input1)
3670 @}
36f63dca
NC
3671@end group
3672@group
252b5132
RH
3673 outputb :
3674 @{
3675 foo.o (.input2)
3676 foo1.o (.input1)
3677 @}
36f63dca
NC
3678@end group
3679@group
252b5132
RH
3680 outputc :
3681 @{
3682 *(.input1)
3683 *(.input2)
3684 @}
3685@}
3686@end group
a1ab1d2a 3687@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
3688
3689@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 3690@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
3691@cindex data
3692@cindex section data
3693@cindex output section data
3694@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
3695@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
3696@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
3697@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
3698@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
3699You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
3700@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
3701an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
3702parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
3703value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
3704counter.
3705
3706The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
3707store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
3708bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
3709stored.
3710
3711For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
3712of the symbol @samp{addr}:
3713@smallexample
3714BYTE(1)
3715LONG(addr)
3716@end smallexample
3717
3718When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
3719same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
3720target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
3721@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
3722@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
3723
3724If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
3725which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
3726When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
3727true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
3728endianness of the first input object file.
3729
36f63dca 3730Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
3731between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
3732@smallexample
3733SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
3734@end smallexample
3735whereas this will work:
3736@smallexample
3737SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
3738@end smallexample
3739
252b5132
RH
3740@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
3741@cindex holes, filling
3742@cindex unspecified memory
3743You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
3744current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
3745otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
3746gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 3747with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
3748necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
3749point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
3750than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
3751different parts of an output section.
3752
3753This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 3754value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 3755@smallexample
563e308f 3756FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
3757@end smallexample
3758
3759The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 3760section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
3761part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
3762entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 3763precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 3764expression.
252b5132
RH
3765
3766@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 3767@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
3768There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
3769commands.
3770
3771@table @code
3772@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
3773@cindex input filename symbols
3774@cindex filename symbols
3775@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
3776The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
3777The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
3778file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
3779the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
3780
3781This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
3782normally used for any other object file format.
3783
3784@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
3785@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
3786@cindex constructors, arranging in link
3787@item CONSTRUCTORS
3788When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
3789unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
3790destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
3791arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
3792automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
3793For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
3794linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
3795@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
3796ignored for other object file formats.
3797
3798The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
3799constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
3800Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
3801the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
3802first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
3803of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
3804compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
3805formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
3806@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
3807the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
3808destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
3809@code{exit}.
3810
3811For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
3812arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
3813addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
3814and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
3815linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
3816runtime code expects to see.
3817
3818@smallexample
3819 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
3820 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
3821 *(.ctors)
3822 LONG(0)
3823 __CTOR_END__ = .;
3824 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
3825 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
3826 *(.dtors)
3827 LONG(0)
3828 __DTOR_END__ = .;
3829@end smallexample
3830
3831If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
3832which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
3833are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
3834are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
3835command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
3836@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
3837@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
3838@samp{*(.dtors)}.
3839
3840Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
3841and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
3842need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
3843scripts.
3844
3845@end table
3846
3847@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 3848@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
3849@cindex discarding sections
3850@cindex sections, discarding
3851@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
3852The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
3853for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
3854be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 3855@smallexample
49c13adb 3856.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
3857@end smallexample
3858@noindent
3859will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
3860@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
3861sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
3862space in an output section will also create the output section.
3863
a0976ea4 3864The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
3865on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
3866symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
3867the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
3868section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
3869
3870@cindex /DISCARD/
3871The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
3872input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
3873section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
3874
3875@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 3876@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
3877@cindex output section attributes
3878We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
3879like this:
3880@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3881@group
7e7d5768 3882@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
bbf115d3 3883 [AT(@var{lma})] [ALIGN(@var{section_align})] [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
252b5132
RH
3884 @{
3885 @var{output-section-command}
3886 @var{output-section-command}
3887 @dots{}
562d3460 3888 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3889@end group
3890@end smallexample
3891We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
3892@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
3893remaining section attributes.
3894
a1ab1d2a 3895@menu
252b5132
RH
3896* Output Section Type:: Output section type
3897* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 3898* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 3899* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
252b5132
RH
3900* Output Section Region:: Output section region
3901* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
3902* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
3903@end menu
3904
3905@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 3906@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
3907Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
3908parentheses. The following types are defined:
3909
3910@table @code
3911@item NOLOAD
3912The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
3913loaded into memory when the program is run.
3914@item DSECT
3915@itemx COPY
3916@itemx INFO
3917@itemx OVERLAY
3918These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
3919rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
3920marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
3921section when the program is run.
3922@end table
3923
3924@kindex NOLOAD
3925@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
3926@cindex loading, preventing
3927The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
3928the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
3929the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
3930@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
3931need to be loaded when the program is run. The contents of the
3932@samp{ROM} section will appear in the linker output file as usual.
3933@smallexample
3934@group
3935SECTIONS @{
3936 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
3937 @dots{}
3938@}
3939@end group
3940@end smallexample
3941
3942@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 3943@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 3944@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
3945@kindex AT(@var{lma})
3946@cindex load address
3947@cindex section load address
3948Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
3949@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The address expression which may appear in
3950an output section description sets the VMA (@pxref{Output Section
3951Address}).
3952
dc0b6aa0
AM
3953The expression @var{lma} that follows the @code{AT} keyword specifies
3954the load address of the section.
6bdafbeb
NC
3955
3956Alternatively, with @samp{AT>@var{lma_region}} expression, you may
3957specify a memory region for the section's load address. @xref{MEMORY}.
3958Note that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the
3959linker will use the @var{lma_region} as the VMA region as well.
dc0b6aa0
AM
3960
3961If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
3962section, the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between
3963VMA and LMA for the section is the same as the preceding output
3964section in the same region. If there is no preceding output section
3965or the section is not allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal
3966to the VMA.
6bdafbeb 3967@xref{Output Section Region}.
252b5132
RH
3968
3969@cindex ROM initialized data
3970@cindex initialized data in ROM
3971This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
3972example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
3973called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
3974@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
3975even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
3976uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
3977defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
3978counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
3979
3980@smallexample
3981@group
3982SECTIONS
3983 @{
3984 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 3985 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
3986 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
3987 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
3988 .bss 0x3000 :
3989 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
3990@}
3991@end group
3992@end smallexample
3993
3994The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
3995this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
3996the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
3997how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
3998script.
3999
4000@smallexample
4001@group
4002extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4003char *src = &_etext;
4004char *dst = &_data;
4005
4006/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4007while (dst < &_edata) @{
4008 *dst++ = *src++;
4009@}
4010
4011/* Zero bss */
4012for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4013 *dst = 0;
4014@end group
4015@end smallexample
4016
bbf115d3
L
4017@node Forced Output Alignment
4018@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4019@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4020@cindex forcing output section alignment
4021@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4022You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4023
7e7d5768
AM
4024@node Forced Input Alignment
4025@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4026@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4027@cindex forcing input section alignment
4028@cindex input section alignment
4029You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4030SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4031sections, whether larger or smaller.
4032
252b5132 4033@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4034@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4035@kindex >@var{region}
4036@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4037@cindex memory regions and sections
4038You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4039using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4040
4041Here is a simple example:
4042@smallexample
4043@group
4044MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4045SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4046@end group
4047@end smallexample
4048
4049@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4050@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4051@kindex :@var{phdr}
4052@cindex section, assigning to program header
4053@cindex program headers and sections
4054You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4055using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4056one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4057assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4058@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4059linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4060
4061Here is a simple example:
4062@smallexample
4063@group
4064PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4065SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4066@end group
4067@end smallexample
4068
4069@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4070@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4071@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4072@cindex section fill pattern
4073@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4074You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4075@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4076(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4077within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4078alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4079necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4080of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4081an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4082fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4083other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4084pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4085expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4086
4087You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4088output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4089
4090Here is a simple example:
4091@smallexample
4092@group
563e308f 4093SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4094@end group
4095@end smallexample
4096
4097@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4098@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4099@kindex OVERLAY
4100@cindex overlays
4101An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4102are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4103the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4104copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4105required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4106can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4107than another.
4108
4109Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4110@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4111output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4112command is as follows:
4113@smallexample
4114@group
4115OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4116 @{
4117 @var{secname1}
4118 @{
4119 @var{output-section-command}
4120 @var{output-section-command}
4121 @dots{}
4122 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4123 @var{secname2}
4124 @{
4125 @var{output-section-command}
4126 @var{output-section-command}
4127 @dots{}
4128 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4129 @dots{}
4130 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4131@end group
4132@end smallexample
4133
4134Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4135section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4136section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4137those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4138except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4139sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4140
4141The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4142addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4143memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4144whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4145and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4146and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4147
4148If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4149among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4150all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4151section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4152NOCROSSREFS}.
4153
4154For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4155provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4156defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4157@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4158the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4159within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4160symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4161
4162At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4163the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4164
4165Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4166@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4167@smallexample
4168@group
4169 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4170 @{
4171 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4172 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4173 @}
4174@end group
4175@end smallexample
4176@noindent
4177This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4178address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4179@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4180following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4181@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4182@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4183
4184C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4185like the following.
4186
4187@smallexample
4188@group
4189 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4190 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4191 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4192@end group
4193@end smallexample
4194
4195Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4196everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4197example could have been written identically as follows.
4198
4199@smallexample
4200@group
4201 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4202 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4203 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4204 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4205 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4206 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4207 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4208@end group
4209@end smallexample
4210
4211@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4212@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4213@kindex MEMORY
4214@cindex memory regions
4215@cindex regions of memory
4216@cindex allocating memory
4217@cindex discontinuous memory
4218The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4219memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4220
4221The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4222memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4223may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4224can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4225set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4226regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4227around to fit into the available regions.
4228
4229A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4230command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4231you wish. The syntax is:
4232@smallexample
4233@group
a1ab1d2a 4234MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4235 @{
4236 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4237 @dots{}
4238 @}
4239@end group
4240@end smallexample
4241
4242The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4243region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4244Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4245with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4246must have a distinct name.
4247
4248@cindex memory region attributes
4249The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4250whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4251not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4252@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4253section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4254the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4255them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4256
4257The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4258@table @samp
4259@item R
4260Read-only section
4261@item W
4262Read/write section
4263@item X
4264Executable section
4265@item A
4266Allocatable section
4267@item I
4268Initialized section
4269@item L
4270Same as @samp{I}
4271@item !
4272Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
4273@end table
4274
4275If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4276@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4277attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4278in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4279attributes.
4280
4281@kindex ORIGIN =
4282@kindex o =
4283@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4284The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4285the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4286cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4287abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4288@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4289
4290@kindex LENGTH =
4291@kindex len =
4292@kindex l =
4293The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4294region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4295be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4296@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4297
4298In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4299available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4300and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4301linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4302is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4303or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4304explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4305region.
4306
4307@smallexample
4308@group
a1ab1d2a 4309MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4310 @{
4311 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4312 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4313 @}
4314@end group
4315@end smallexample
4316
4317Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4318specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4319@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4320a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4321output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4322was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4323the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4324output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4325region, the linker will issue an error message.
4326
3ec57632 4327It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4328expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4329@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4330
4331@smallexample
4332@group
c0065db7 4333 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4334@end group
4335@end smallexample
4336
252b5132
RH
4337@node PHDRS
4338@section PHDRS Command
4339@kindex PHDRS
4340@cindex program headers
4341@cindex ELF program headers
4342@cindex program segments
4343@cindex segments, ELF
4344The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4345@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4346loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4347program with the @samp{-p} option.
4348
4349When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4350reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4351program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4352This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4353interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4354
4355The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4356in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4357precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4358the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4359not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4360
4361The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4362generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4363ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4364
4365This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4366@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4367
4368@smallexample
4369@group
4370PHDRS
4371@{
4372 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4373 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4374@}
4375@end group
4376@end smallexample
4377
4378The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4379of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4380header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4381with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
4382must have a distinct name.
4383
4384Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4385system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4386specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4387sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4388attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4389Section Phdr}.
4390
4391It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4392merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4393repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4394contain the section.
4395
4396If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4397then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4398not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4399convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4400placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4401default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4402segment at all.
4403
4404@kindex FILEHDR
4405@kindex PHDRS
4406You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords appear after
4407the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4408The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4409file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
4410include the ELF program headers themselves.
4411
4412The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4413value of the keyword.
4414
4415@table @asis
4416@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4417Indicates an unused program header.
4418
4419@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4420Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4421the file.
4422
4423@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4424Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4425
4426@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4427Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4428found.
4429
4430@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4431Indicates a segment holding note information.
4432
4433@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4434A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4435ABI.
4436
4437@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4438Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4439
4440@item @var{expression}
4441An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4442be used for types not defined above.
4443@end table
4444
4445You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4446in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4447@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4448Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4449output section attribute.
4450
4451The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4452which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4453explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4454an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4455header.
4456
4457Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4458headers used on a native ELF system.
4459
4460@example
4461@group
4462PHDRS
4463@{
4464 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4465 interp PT_INTERP ;
4466 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4467 data PT_LOAD ;
4468 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4469@}
4470
4471SECTIONS
4472@{
4473 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4474 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4475 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4476 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4477 @dots{}
4478 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4479 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4480 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4481 @dots{}
4482@}
4483@end group
4484@end example
4485
4486@node VERSION
4487@section VERSION Command
4488@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4489@cindex symbol versions
4490@cindex version script
4491@cindex versions of symbols
4492The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4493only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4494symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4495a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4496shared library.
4497
4498You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4499you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4500also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4501
4502The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4503@smallexample
4504VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4505@end smallexample
4506
4507The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4508Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4509version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4510version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4511version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4512scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4513library.
4514
4515The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4516examples.
4517
4518@smallexample
4519VERS_1.1 @{
4520 global:
4521 foo1;
4522 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
4523 old*;
4524 original*;
4525 new*;
252b5132
RH
4526@};
4527
4528VERS_1.2 @{
4529 foo2;
4530@} VERS_1.1;
4531
4532VERS_2.0 @{
4533 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 4534 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb
MM
4535 ns::*;
4536 "int f(int, double)";
c0065db7 4537 @}
252b5132
RH
4538@} VERS_1.2;
4539@end smallexample
4540
4541This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
4542version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
4543The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
4544a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
4545of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4546symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
4547is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
4548in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
4549However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
4550name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
4551
4552Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
4553depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
4554to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
4555
4556Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
4557depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
4558and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
4559
4560When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4561specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4562unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 4563unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
252b5132
RH
4564somewhere in the version script.
4565
4566The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
4567they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
4568could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
4569However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
4570
0f6bf451 4571Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
4572in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
4573symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
4574won't.
4575
4576@smallexample
7c9c73be 4577@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 4578@end smallexample
6b9b879a 4579
252b5132
RH
4580When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
4581symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
4582requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
4583shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
4584loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
4585linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
4586application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
4587way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
4588all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
4589search for each symbol reference.
4590
4591The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
4592doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
4593that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
4594functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
4595the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
4596required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
4597that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
4598versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
4599the libraries being used with the application are too old.
4600
4601There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
4602first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
4603source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
4604script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
4605maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
4606@smallexample
4607__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4608@end smallexample
4609@noindent
4610in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
4611be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
4612The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
4613@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
4614takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
4615
4616The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
4617function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
4618an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
4619version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
4620linked against the old interface to continue to function.
4621
4622To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
4623source file. Here is an example:
4624
4625@smallexample
4626__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
4627__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4628__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
4629__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
4630@end smallexample
4631
4632In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
4633unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
4634example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
4635@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
4636
4637When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
4638some way to specify a default version to which external references to
4639this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
4640@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
4641declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
4642you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
4643
4644If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
4645within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 4646(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
4647specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
4648
cb840a31
L
4649You can also specify the language in the version script:
4650
4651@smallexample
4652VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
4653@end smallexample
4654
c0065db7 4655The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
4656The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
4657demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
4658patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}.
4659
86043bbb
MM
4660Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
4661described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
4662or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
4663the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
4664whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
4665cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
4666might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
4667should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
4668expect when you upgrade.
4669
252b5132
RH
4670@node Expressions
4671@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
4672@cindex expressions
4673@cindex arithmetic
4674The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
4675that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
4676expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
4677host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
4678
4679You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
4680
4681The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
4682expressions.
4683
4684@menu
4685* Constants:: Constants
4686* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 4687* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
4688* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
4689* Operators:: Operators
4690* Evaluation:: Evaluation
4691* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
4692* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
4693@end menu
4694
4695@node Constants
4696@subsection Constants
4697@cindex integer notation
4698@cindex constants in linker scripts
4699All constants are integers.
4700
4701As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
4702octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
4703hexadecimal. The linker considers other integers to be decimal.
4704
4705@cindex scaled integers
4706@cindex K and M integer suffixes
4707@cindex M and K integer suffixes
4708@cindex suffixes for integers
4709@cindex integer suffixes
4710In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
4711constant by
4712@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4713@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4714@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4715@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
4716@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4717@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4718@tex
4719${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
4720@end tex
4721@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4722respectively. For example, the following all refer to the same quantity:
4723@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
4724_fourk_1 = 4K;
4725_fourk_2 = 4096;
4726_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
252b5132
RH
4727@end smallexample
4728
4729@node Symbols
4730@subsection Symbol Names
4731@cindex symbol names
4732@cindex names
4733@cindex quoted symbol names
4734@kindex "
4735Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
4736and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
4737Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
4738specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
4739keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
4740@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
4741"SECTION" = 9;
4742"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
4743@end smallexample
4744
4745Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
4746to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
4747whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
4748
ecca9871
L
4749@node Orphan Sections
4750@subsection Orphan Sections
4751@cindex orphan
4752Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
4753are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
4754script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
4755output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
4756placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
4757attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
4758same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
4759If there is not enough room to do this then it places
4760at the end of the file.
4761
4762For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
4763well as section flag.
4764
41911f68 4765If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 4766the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
41911f68
NC
4767__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
4768section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
4769orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
4770representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
4771character.
4772
252b5132
RH
4773@node Location Counter
4774@subsection The Location Counter
4775@kindex .
4776@cindex dot
4777@cindex location counter
4778@cindex current output location
4779The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
4780current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
4781location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
4782within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
4783anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
4784
4785@cindex holes
4786Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
4787moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
4788location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
4789and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
4790doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
4791
4792@smallexample
4793SECTIONS
4794@{
4795 output :
4796 @{
4797 file1(.text)
4798 . = . + 1000;
4799 file2(.text)
4800 . += 1000;
4801 file3(.text)
563e308f 4802 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
4803@}
4804@end smallexample
4805@noindent
4806In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
4807located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
4808followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
4809@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 4810@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
4811specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
4812
5c6bbab8
NC
4813@cindex dot inside sections
4814Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
4815current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 4816statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
4817absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
4818however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
4819not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
4820
4821@smallexample
4822SECTIONS
4823@{
4824 . = 0x100
4825 .text: @{
4826 *(.text)
4827 . = 0x200
4828 @}
4829 . = 0x500
4830 .data: @{
4831 *(.data)
4832 . += 0x600
4833 @}
4834@}
4835@end smallexample
4836
4837The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
4838and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
4839the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
4840much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
4841move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
4842and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
4843the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
4844the @samp{.data} output section itself.
4845
b5666f2f
AM
4846@cindex dot outside sections
4847Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
4848output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
4849needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
4850
4851@smallexample
4852SECTIONS
4853@{
4854 start_of_text = . ;
4855 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
4856 end_of_text = . ;
4857
4858 start_of_data = . ;
4859 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
4860 end_of_data = . ;
4861@}
4862@end smallexample
4863
4864If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
4865not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
4866between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
4867should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
4868blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
4869the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
4870sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
4871statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
4872special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
4873place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
4874as follows:
4875
4876@smallexample
4877SECTIONS
4878@{
4879 start_of_text = . ;
4880 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
4881 end_of_text = . ;
4882
4883 start_of_data = . ;
4884 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
4885 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
4886 end_of_data = . ;
4887@}
4888@end smallexample
4889
4890This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
4891@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
4892placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
4893assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
4894a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
4895section. So you could write:
4896
4897@smallexample
4898SECTIONS
4899@{
4900 start_of_text = . ;
4901 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
4902 end_of_text = . ;
4903
4904 . = . ;
4905 start_of_data = . ;
4906 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
4907 end_of_data = . ;
4908@}
4909@end smallexample
4910
4911Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
4912@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
4913
252b5132
RH
4914@need 2000
4915@node Operators
4916@subsection Operators
4917@cindex operators for arithmetic
4918@cindex arithmetic operators
4919@cindex precedence in expressions
4920The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
4921the standard bindings and precedence levels:
4922@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4923@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4924@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4925@smallexample
4926precedence associativity Operators Notes
4927(highest)
49281 left ! - ~ (1)
49292 left * / %
49303 left + -
49314 left >> <<
49325 left == != > < <= >=
49336 left &
49347 left |
49358 left &&
49369 left ||
493710 right ? :
493811 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
4939(lowest)
4940@end smallexample
4941Notes:
a1ab1d2a 4942(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
4943(2) @xref{Assignments}.
4944@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4945@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4946@tex
4947\vskip \baselineskip
4948%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
4949\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
4950\hrule
4951\halign
4952{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
4953height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
4954&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
4955height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
4956\noalign{\hrule}
4957height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
4958&highest&&&&&\cr
4959% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 4960&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
4961&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
4962&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
4963&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
4964&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
4965&6&&left&&\&&\cr
4966&7&&left&&|&\cr
4967&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
4968&9&&left&&||&\cr
4969&10&&right&&? :&\cr
4970&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
4971&lowest&&&&&\cr
4972height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
4973\hrule}
4974@end tex
4975@iftex
4976{
4977@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
4978@dag@quad Prefix operators.
4979@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
4980}
4981@end iftex
4982@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4983
4984@node Evaluation
4985@subsection Evaluation
4986@cindex lazy evaluation
4987@cindex expression evaluation order
4988The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
4989an expression when absolutely necessary.
4990
4991The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
4992address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
4993regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
4994as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
4995
4996However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
4997until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
4998other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
4999for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5000
5001The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5002assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5003allocation.
5004
5005Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5006@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5007
5008If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5009available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5010following
5011@smallexample
5012@group
5013SECTIONS
5014 @{
a1ab1d2a 5015 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5016 @{ *(.text) @}
5017 @}
5018@end group
5019@end smallexample
5020@noindent
5021will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5022address}.
5023
5024@node Expression Section
5025@subsection The Section of an Expression
5026@cindex expression sections
5027@cindex absolute expressions
5028@cindex relative expressions
5029@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5030@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5031@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5032When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
5033or relative to some section. A relative expression is expressed as a
5034fixed offset from the base of a section.
5035
5036The position of the expression within the linker script determines
5037whether it is absolute or relative. An expression which appears within
5038an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
5039section. An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
5040
5041A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you request
5042relocatable output using the @samp{-r} option. That means that a
5043further link operation may change the value of the symbol. The symbol's
5044section will be the section of the relative expression.
5045
5046A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
5047through any further link operation. The symbol will be absolute, and
5048will not have any particular associated section.
5049
5050You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5051to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5052create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5053section @samp{.data}:
5054@smallexample
5055SECTIONS
5056 @{
5057 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5058 @}
5059@end smallexample
5060@noindent
5061If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5062@samp{.data} section.
5063
5064@node Builtin Functions
5065@subsection Builtin Functions
5066@cindex functions in expressions
5067The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5068use in linker script expressions.
5069
5070@table @code
5071@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5072@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5073@cindex expression, absolute
5074Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5075of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5076value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5077normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5078
5079@item ADDR(@var{section})
5080@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5081@cindex section address in expression
5082Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5083script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5084the following example, @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned
5085identical values:
5086@smallexample
5087@group
5088SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5089 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5090 @{
252b5132
RH
5091 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5092 @dots{}
5093 @}
5094 .output :
5095 @{
5096 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5097 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5098 @}
5099@dots{} @}
5100@end group
5101@end smallexample
5102
876f4090
NS
5103@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5104@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5105@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5106@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5107@cindex round up location counter
5108@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5109@cindex round up expression
5110@cindex align expression
5111Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5112to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5113doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5114arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5115expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5116equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5117
5118Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5119next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5120variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5121input sections:
252b5132
RH
5122@smallexample
5123@group
5124SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5125 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5126 *(.data)
5127 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5128 @}
5129@dots{} @}
5130@end group
5131@end smallexample
5132@noindent
5133The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5134a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5135a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5136of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5137
5138The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5139
362c1d1a
NS
5140@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5141@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5142@cindex section alignment
5143Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5144been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5145evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5146the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5147value in that section.
5148@smallexample
5149@group
5150SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5151 .output @{
5152 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5153 @dots{}
5154 @}
5155@dots{} @}
5156@end group
5157@end smallexample
5158
252b5132
RH
5159@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5160@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5161This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5162scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5163section.
5164
2d20f7bf
JJ
5165@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5166@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5167This is equivalent to either
5168@smallexample
5169(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5170@end smallexample
5171or
5172@smallexample
5173(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5174@end smallexample
5175@noindent
5176depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5177for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5178@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5179If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5180memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5181bytes in the on-disk file.
5182
5183This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5184any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5185@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5186be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5187working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5188
5189@noindent
5190Example:
5191@smallexample
5192 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5193@end smallexample
5194
5195@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5196@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5197This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5198evaluation purposes.
5199
5200@smallexample
5201 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5202@end smallexample
5203
a4f5ad88
JJ
5204@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5205@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5206This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5207@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5208When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5209does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5210@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5211boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5212it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5213@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5214
5215@smallexample
5216 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5217@end smallexample
5218
252b5132
RH
5219@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5220@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5221@cindex symbol defaults
5222Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5223defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5224return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5225default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5226shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5227the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5228existed, its value is preserved:
5229
5230@smallexample
5231@group
5232SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5233 .text : @{
5234 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5235 @dots{}
5236 @}
5237 @dots{}
5238@}
5239@end group
5240@end smallexample
5241
3ec57632
NC
5242@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5243@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5244Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5245
252b5132
RH
5246@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5247@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5248@cindex section load address in expression
5249Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. This is normally
5250the same as @code{ADDR}, but it may be different if the @code{AT}
5251attribute is used in the output section definition (@pxref{Output
5252Section LMA}).
5253
5254@kindex MAX
5255@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5256Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5257
5258@kindex MIN
5259@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5260Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5261
5262@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5263@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5264@cindex unallocated address, next
5265Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5266This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5267use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5268output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5269
3ec57632
NC
5270@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5271@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5272Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5273
ba916c8a
MM
5274@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5275@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5276Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5277value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5278option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5279@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5280be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
5281``bss'' sections, but you use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
5282name.
5283
252b5132
RH
5284@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5285@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5286@cindex section size
5287Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5288been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5289evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5290@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5291@smallexample
5292@group
5293SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5294 .output @{
5295 .start = . ;
5296 @dots{}
5297 .end = . ;
5298 @}
5299 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5300 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5301@dots{} @}
5302@end group
5303@end smallexample
5304
5305@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5306@itemx sizeof_headers
5307@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5308@cindex header size
5309Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5310information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5311this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5312choose, to facilitate paging.
5313
5314@cindex not enough room for program headers
5315@cindex program headers, not enough room
5316When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5317@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5318number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5319addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5320additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5321room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5322the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5323script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5324you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5325command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5326@end table
5327
5328@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5329@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5330@cindex implicit linker scripts
5331If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5332an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5333linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5334linker will report an error.
5335
5336An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5337
5338Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5339assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5340commands.
5341
5342Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5343at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5344read. This can affect archive searching.
5345
5346@ifset GENERIC
5347@node Machine Dependent
5348@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5349
5350@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5351@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5352sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5353functionality are not listed.
5354
5355@menu
36f63dca
NC
5356@ifset H8300
5357* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5358@end ifset
5359@ifset I960
5360* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5361@end ifset
5362@ifset ARM
5363* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5364@end ifset
5365@ifset HPPA
5366* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5367@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
5368@ifset M68K
5369* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5370@end ifset
3c3bdf30 5371@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 5372* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 5373@end ifset
2469cfa2 5374@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 5375* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 5376@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
5377@ifset M68HC11
5378* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5379@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
5380@ifset POWERPC
5381* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5382@end ifset
5383@ifset POWERPC64
5384* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5385@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
5386@ifset SPU
5387* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5388@end ifset
74459f0e 5389@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 5390* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 5391@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
5392@ifset WIN32
5393* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5394@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
5395@ifset XTENSA
5396* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5397@end ifset
252b5132
RH
5398@end menu
5399@end ifset
5400
252b5132
RH
5401@ifset H8300
5402@ifclear GENERIC
5403@raisesections
5404@end ifclear
5405
5406@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 5407@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
5408
5409@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 5410For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
5411you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5412
5413@table @emph
5414@cindex relaxing on H8/300
5415@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 5416@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
5417targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5418program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5419respectively.
5420
5421@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5422@item synthesizing instructions
5423@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 5424@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
5425sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5426page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5427(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5428@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5429top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
5430
5431@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 5432@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 5433biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 5434which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
5435page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
5436(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 5437@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
5438the top page of memory).
5439
5440@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
5441@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
544232 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
5443changes them to use 16 bit address form.
5444(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 5445@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 5446the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
5447@end table
5448
5449@ifclear GENERIC
5450@lowersections
5451@end ifclear
5452@end ifset
5453
36f63dca 5454@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 5455@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 5456@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
5457@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
5458@node Renesas
5459@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 5460
c2dcd04e
NC
5461@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
5462H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
5463options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
5464@end ifset
5465@end ifclear
5466
5467@ifset I960
5468@ifclear GENERIC
5469@raisesections
5470@end ifclear
5471
5472@node i960
5473@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
5474
5475@cindex i960 support
5476
5477You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
5478specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
5479family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
5480incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
5481linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
5482libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
5483search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
5484
5485For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
5486well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
5487paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
5488the names
5489
5490@smallexample
5491@group
5492try
5493libtry.a
5494tryca
5495libtryca.a
5496@end group
5497@end smallexample
5498
5499@noindent
5500The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
5501two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
5502
5503You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
5504the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
5505use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
5506specifies a library.
5507
5508@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
5509@cindex relaxing on i960
5510@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
5511you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
5512@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
5513them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
5514instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
5515instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
5516target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
5517not itself call any subroutines).
5518
5519@ifclear GENERIC
5520@lowersections
5521@end ifclear
5522@end ifset
5523
5524@ifset ARM
5525@ifclear GENERIC
5526@raisesections
5527@end ifclear
5528
93fd0973
SC
5529@ifset M68HC11
5530@ifclear GENERIC
5531@raisesections
5532@end ifclear
5533
5534@node M68HC11/68HC12
5535@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5536
5537@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
5538
5539@subsection Linker Relaxation
5540
5541For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
5542optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5543
5544@table @emph
5545@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
5546@item relaxing address modes
5547@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
5548targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5549program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5550respectively.
5551
5552@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
5553transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
5554page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
5555
5556@item relaxing gcc instruction group
5557When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
5558of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
5559addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
5560@code{bset} instructions.
5561
5562@end table
5563
5564@subsection Trampoline Generation
5565
5566@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
5567@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
5568For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
5569call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 5570will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
5571trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
5572case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
5573point to the function trampoline.
5574
5575@ifclear GENERIC
5576@lowersections
5577@end ifclear
5578@end ifset
5579
36f63dca 5580@node ARM
3674e28a 5581@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
5582
5583@cindex ARM interworking support
5584@kindex --support-old-code
5585For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 5586between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
5587been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
5588line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
5589libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
5590option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
5591given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
5592which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
5593the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
5594non-interworking aware Thumb code.
5595
5596@cindex thumb entry point
5597@cindex entry point, thumb
5598@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
5599The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
5600@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
5601But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
5602branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
5603executing in Thumb mode straight away.
5604
e489d0ae
PB
5605@cindex BE8
5606@kindex --be8
5607The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
5608executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
5609The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
5610
3674e28a
PB
5611@cindex TARGET1
5612@kindex --target1-rel
5613@kindex --target1-abs
5614The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
5615@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
5616or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
5617and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
5618
5619@cindex TARGET2
5620@kindex --target2=@var{type}
5621The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
5622@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
5623meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
5624@table @samp
5625@item rel
eeac373a
PB
5626@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
5627@item abs
5628@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
5629@item got-rel
5630@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
5631@end table
5632
319850b4
JB
5633@cindex FIX_V4BX
5634@kindex --fix-v4bx
5635The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
5636specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
5637interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
5638also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
5639
5640In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
5641linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
5642@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
5643
5644In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
5645relocations are ignored.
5646
845b51d6
PB
5647@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
5648@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
5649Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
5650relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
5651
5652@smallexample
5653TST rM, #1
5654MOVEQ PC, rM
5655BX Rn
5656@end smallexample
5657
5658This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
5659and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
5660condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
5661
33bfe774
JB
5662@cindex USE_BLX
5663@kindex --use-blx
5664The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
5665BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
5666situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
5667code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
5668each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
5669
5670This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
5671specify it if you are using that target.
5672
c6dd86c6
JB
5673@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
5674@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
5675The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
5676bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
5677instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
5678to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
5679the support code can read the intended values.
5680
5681The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
5682intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
5683and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
5684intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
5685full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
5686you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
5687
5688If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
5689enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
5690@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
5691mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
5692vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
5693@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
5694
5695If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
5696potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
5697such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
5698first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
5699instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
5700the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
5701are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
5702
bf21ed78
MS
5703@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
5704@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 5705The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
5706warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
5707enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
5708linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
5709using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
5710not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
5711
5712@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
5713@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
5714The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
5715warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
5716@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
5717linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
5718using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 5719
726150b7
NC
5720@cindex PIC_VENEER
5721@kindex --pic-veneer
5722The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
5723ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
5724is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
5725@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
5726
5727@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
5728@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
5729The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
5730code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
5731perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
5732placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
5733controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
5734The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
5735duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
5736group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
5737code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
5738where they should be placed.
5739
5740The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
5741@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
5742placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed before the first
5743branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
5744placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
5745value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
5746exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
5747A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
5748linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
5749from the input sections.
5750
5751The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
5752@samp{N = +1}.
5753
1a51c1a4
NC
5754Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
5755only, because it relies on object files properties not present
5756otherwise.
5757
36f63dca
NC
5758@ifclear GENERIC
5759@lowersections
5760@end ifclear
5761@end ifset
5762
5763@ifset HPPA
5764@ifclear GENERIC
5765@raisesections
5766@end ifclear
5767
5768@node HPPA ELF32
5769@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
5770@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
5771@kindex --multi-subspace
5772When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
5773import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
5774The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
5775stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
5776multiple sub-spaces.
5777
5778@cindex HPPA stub grouping
5779@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
5780Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
5781stub sections located between groups of input sections.
5782@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
5783sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
5784a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
5785the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
5786conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
5787prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
5788A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
5789branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
5790@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
5791@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
5792detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
5793positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
5794
5795Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
5796single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
5797create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
5798large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
5799
5800@ifclear GENERIC
5801@lowersections
5802@end ifclear
5803@end ifset
5804
7fb9f789
NC
5805@ifset M68K
5806@ifclear GENERIC
5807@raisesections
5808@end ifclear
5809
5810@node M68K
5811@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5812
5813@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
5814@kindex --got=@var{type}
5815The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
5816The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
5817@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
5818the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
5819@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
5820entries only at non-negative offsets.
5821@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
5822entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
5823support such GOTs.
5824@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
5825output file. All GOT references from a single input object
5826file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
5827files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
5828
5829@ifclear GENERIC
5830@lowersections
5831@end ifclear
5832@end ifset
5833
36f63dca
NC
5834@ifset MMIX
5835@ifclear GENERIC
5836@raisesections
5837@end ifclear
5838
5839@node MMIX
5840@section @code{ld} and MMIX
5841For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
5842@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
5843understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
5844can translate between the two formats.
5845
5846There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
5847Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
5848registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
5849equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
5850@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
5851global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
5852this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
5853symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
5854
7a2de473
HPN
5855Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
5856@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
5857The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
5858of a section.
36f63dca
NC
5859
5860Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
5861are left out from an mmo file.
5862
5863@ifclear GENERIC
5864@lowersections
5865@end ifclear
5866@end ifset
5867
5868@ifset MSP430
5869@ifclear GENERIC
5870@raisesections
5871@end ifclear
5872
5873@node MSP430
5874@section @code{ld} and MSP430
5875For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
5876will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
5877just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
5878
5879@cindex MSP430 extra sections
5880The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
5881
5882@table @code
5883@item @samp{.vectors}
5884Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
5885
5886@item @samp{.bootloader}
5887Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
5888in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
5889
5890@item @samp{.infomem}
5891Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
5892this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
5893
c0065db7 5894@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
5895This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
5896in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
5897
5898@item @samp{.noinit}
5899Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
5900
c0065db7 5901The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
5902@end table
5903
5904@ifclear GENERIC
5905@lowersections
5906@end ifclear
5907@end ifset
5908
2a60a7a8
AM
5909@ifset POWERPC
5910@ifclear GENERIC
5911@raisesections
5912@end ifclear
5913
5914@node PowerPC ELF32
5915@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5916@cindex PowerPC long branches
5917@kindex --relax on PowerPC
5918Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
5919displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
5920@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
5921@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
5922the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
5923section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
5924section exceeds 33M in size.
5925
5926@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
5927@table @option
5928@cindex PowerPC PLT
5929@kindex --bss-plt
5930@item --bss-plt
5931Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
5932generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
5933the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
5934writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
5935@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
5936PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
5937compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
5938BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
5939
016687f8
AM
5940@kindex --secure-plt
5941@item --secure-plt
5942@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
5943@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
5944when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
5945layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
5946style BSS PLT.
5947
2a60a7a8
AM
5948@cindex PowerPC GOT
5949@kindex --sdata-got
5950@item --sdata-got
5951The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
5952sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
5953@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
5954section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
5955@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
5956@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
5957@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
5958@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
5959PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
5960pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
5961GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
5962really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
5963
5964@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
5965@kindex --emit-stub-syms
5966@item --emit-stub-syms
5967This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
5968symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
5969
5970@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
5971@kindex --no-tls-optimize
5972@item --no-tls-optimize
5973PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
5974sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
5975disable the optimization.
5976@end table
5977
5978@ifclear GENERIC
5979@lowersections
5980@end ifclear
5981@end ifset
5982
5983@ifset POWERPC64
5984@ifclear GENERIC
5985@raisesections
5986@end ifclear
5987
5988@node PowerPC64 ELF64
5989@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5990
5991@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
5992@table @option
5993@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
5994@kindex --stub-group-size
5995@item --stub-group-size
5996Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
5997by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
5998@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
5999sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6000a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6001the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6002conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6003prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6004A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6005branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6006@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6007@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6008detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6009positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6010
6011Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6012single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6013create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6014large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6015
6016@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6017@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6018@item --emit-stub-syms
6019This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6020symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6021
6022@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6023@kindex --dotsyms
6024@kindex --no-dotsyms
6025@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6026These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6027in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6028function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6029code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6030properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6031to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6032@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6033dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6034feature.
6035
6036@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6037@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6038@item --no-tls-optimize
6039PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6040sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6041disable the optimization.
6042
6043@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6044@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6045@item --no-opd-optimize
6046PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6047corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6048the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6049Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6050
6051@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6052@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6053@item --non-overlapping-opd
6054Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6055@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6056the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6057entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6058
6059@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6060@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6061@item --no-toc-optimize
6062PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6063entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6064reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6065marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6066marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6067relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6068unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6069reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6070discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6071reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6072code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6073optimization.
6074
6075@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6076@kindex --no-multi-toc
6077@item --no-multi-toc
6078By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6079entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6080total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6081grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6082TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6083calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6084help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
608564K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6086Use this option to turn off this feature.
6087@end table
6088
6089@ifclear GENERIC
6090@lowersections
6091@end ifclear
6092@end ifset
6093
49fa1e15
AM
6094@ifset SPU
6095@ifclear GENERIC
6096@raisesections
6097@end ifclear
6098
6099@node SPU ELF
6100@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6101
6102@cindex SPU ELF options
6103@table @option
6104
6105@cindex SPU plugins
6106@kindex --plugin
6107@item --plugin
6108This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6109
6110@cindex SPU overlays
6111@kindex --no-overlays
6112@item --no-overlays
6113Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6114regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6115@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6116turns off all this special overlay handling.
6117
6118@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6119@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6120@item --emit-stub-syms
6121This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6122symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6123
6124@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6125@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6126@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6127This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6128function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6129on calls to non-overlay regions.
6130
6131@cindex SPU local store size
6132@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6133@item --local-store=lo:hi
6134@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6135the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6136range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6137
c0065db7 6138@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6139@kindex --stack-analysis
6140@item --stack-analysis
6141SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6142unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6143under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6144@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6145@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6146determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6147for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6148for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6149for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6150find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6151and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6152under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6153dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6154is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6155and calls will be given.
6156
c0065db7 6157@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6158@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6159@item --emit-stack-syms
6160This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6161in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6162These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6163functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6164functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6165such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6166The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6167@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6168@end table
6169
6170@ifclear GENERIC
6171@lowersections
6172@end ifclear
6173@end ifset
6174
36f63dca
NC
6175@ifset TICOFF
6176@ifclear GENERIC
6177@raisesections
6178@end ifclear
6179
6180@node TI COFF
6181@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6182@cindex TI COFF versions
6183@kindex --format=@var{version}
6184The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6185TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6186also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6187format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6188header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6189
6190@ifclear GENERIC
6191@lowersections
6192@end ifclear
6193@end ifset
6194
2ca22b03
NC
6195@ifset WIN32
6196@ifclear GENERIC
6197@raisesections
6198@end ifclear
6199
6200@node WIN32
6201@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6202
c0065db7 6203This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6204See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6205command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6206
6207@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6208@cindex import libraries
6209@item import libraries
69da35b5 6210The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6211libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6212regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6213archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6214support for creating such libraries provided with the
6215@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6216
c0065db7
RM
6217@item exporting DLL symbols
6218@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6219The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6220
6221@table @emph
6222@item using auto-export functionality
6223@cindex using auto-export functionality
6224By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6225which is controlled by the following command line options:
6226
0a5d968e
NC
6227@itemize
6228@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6229@item --exclude-symbols
6230@item --exclude-libs
6231@end itemize
6232
c0065db7 6233If, however, @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6234command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6235if either of the following are true:
6236
6237@itemize
6238@item A DEF file is used.
6239@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6240@end itemize
dc8465bf 6241
c0065db7
RM
6242@item using a DEF file
6243@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6244Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6245an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6246exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6247name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6248command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6249
6250@example
6251gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6252@end example
6253
0a5d968e
NC
6254Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6255@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6256
dc8465bf
NC
6257Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6258
6259@example
4b5bd4e7 6260LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6261
6262EXPORTS
6263foo
6264bar
6265_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6266another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6267var1 DATA
c0065db7 6268@end example
dc8465bf 6269
4b5bd4e7
DS
6270This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and five
6271symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6272alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6273by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6274@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
6275@code{var1} is declared to be a data object.
6276
6b31ad16
DS
6277The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6278name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6279the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6280
b45619c0
NC
6281When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6282library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 6283@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 6284executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
6285
6286With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6287specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 6288non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
6289
6290If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
6291or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6292filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 6293
4b5bd4e7
DS
6294The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6295
6296@example
6297EXPORTS
6298 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6299 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
6300 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] ) *
c0065db7 6301@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
6302
6303Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6304@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6305@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6306@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6307Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
6308@samp{<integer>} alias.
6309
6310The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6311
6312@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6313will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6314by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6315linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6316library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6317
6318@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6319The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6320the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6321@code{*_imp__foo}).
6322
6323@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6324well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6325read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6326variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6327the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6328extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6329application will behave unexpectedly.
6330
6331@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6332it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6333symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6334API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6335the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 6336
4b5bd4e7
DS
6337See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6338other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
6339
6340@cindex creating a DEF file
6341While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6342with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
6343
6344@item Using decorations
6345@cindex Using decorations
6346Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6347itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6348declared as:
6349
6350@example
6351__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6352__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6353@end example
6354
6355All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6356any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6357this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6358the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6359
6360Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 6361decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
6362instead:
6363
6364@example
6365__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6366__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6367@end example
6368
c0065db7
RM
6369This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6370when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
6371variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6372code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 6373of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
6374omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6375@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 6376information.
c0065db7 6377@end table
dc8465bf 6378
2ca22b03
NC
6379@cindex automatic data imports
6380@item automatic data imports
6381The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 6382by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 6383compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 6384issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 6385code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 6386c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 6387initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 6388decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 6389platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
6390command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6391The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6392suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6393trigger the feature's use.
6394
c0065db7 6395auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
6396additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
6397
c0065db7 6398"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
6399documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
6400
c0065db7
RM
6401The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
6402occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
6403One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
6404below.
6405
6406@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
6407For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
6408object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
6409offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
6410field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
6411in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 6412without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 6413The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
6414references.
6415
c0065db7
RM
6416The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
6417be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
6418themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
6419runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
6420compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
6421support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
6422run without error on an older system.
6423
c0065db7
RM
6424@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
6425enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
6426
6427@cindex direct linking to a dll
6428@item direct linking to a dll
6429The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
6430including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 6431libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 6432traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
6433libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
6434function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
6435though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 6436storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 6437tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
6438large or complex libraries when using import libs.
6439
c0065db7 6440Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 6441@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 6442of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
6443perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
6444select the dll instead of an import library.
6445
2ca22b03 6446
69da35b5
NC
6447For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
6448to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
6449
6450@example
45e948fe
NC
6451libxxx.dll.a
6452xxx.dll.a
6453libxxx.a
6454xxx.lib
69da35b5 6455cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
6456libxxx.dll
6457xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
6458@end example
6459
69da35b5
NC
6460before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
6461
c0065db7
RM
6462(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
6463where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
6464@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
6465file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
6466@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
6467
c0065db7
RM
6468Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
6469@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
6470was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
6471various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
6472could coexist on the same machine.
6473
2ca22b03
NC
6474The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
6475applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 6476libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
6477
6478@example
6479bin/
6480 cygxxx.dll
6481lib/
6482 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 6483 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
6484@end example
6485
c0065db7
RM
6486Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
6487done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
6488
64891. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
6490@example
6491gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6492@end example
2ca22b03 6493
69da35b5
NC
6494However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
6495(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
6496@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
6497not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
6498
2ca22b03
NC
64992. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
6500directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
6501should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
6502making the app/dll.
6503
6504@example
6505ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 6506@end example
2ca22b03
NC
6507
6508Then you can link without any make environment changes.
6509
6510@example
6511gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6512@end example
69da35b5
NC
6513
6514This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
6515perfectly legal
6516
6517@example
6518bin/
6519 cygxxx-5.dll
6520lib/
c0065db7 6521 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
6522@end example
6523
dc8465bf 6524Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
6525even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
6526@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
6527
6528Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 6529wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
6530
65311. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
6532work with auto-imported data.
6533
dc8465bf
NC
65342. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
6535import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
6536symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
6537for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
6538possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 6539
45e948fe
NC
65403. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
6541critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
6542in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
6543stdcall-decorated assembly names.
6544
69da35b5 6545So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
6546true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
6547a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
6548binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
6549massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
6550requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
6551will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 6552
c0065db7 6553@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 6554@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6555@item adding additional names
6556Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
6557A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
6558exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
6559when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 6560import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 6561
c0065db7 6562@example
dc8465bf
NC
6563LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6564
6565EXPORTS
c0065db7 6566foo
dc8465bf 6567_foo = foo
c0065db7 6568@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6569
6570The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
6571
6572Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
6573source code using the "weak" attribute:
6574
c0065db7
RM
6575@example
6576void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 6577void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 6578@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6579
6580See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
6581symbols.
6582
6583@item renaming symbols
6584Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 6585kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
6586@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
6587DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 6588created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 6589
c0065db7 6590@example
dc8465bf
NC
6591LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6592
6593EXPORTS
6594_foo = foo
c0065db7 6595@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6596
6597The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
6598@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 6599@end table
dc8465bf 6600
0a5d968e 6601Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 6602unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 6603If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
6604@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
6605that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
6606@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
6607renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
6608to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
6609the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
6610In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 6611which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
6612
6613@cindex weak externals
6614@item weak externals
6615The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
6616weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
6617defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
6618are three variants of weak externals:
6619@itemize
6620@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
6621called lazy externals.
6622@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
6623This form is not presently implemented.
6624@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
6625implemented.
6626@end itemize
6627As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
6628are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
6629uses a default value.
2ca22b03
NC
6630@end table
6631
6632@ifclear GENERIC
6633@lowersections
6634@end ifclear
6635@end ifset
6636
e0001a05
NC
6637@ifset XTENSA
6638@ifclear GENERIC
6639@raisesections
6640@end ifclear
6641
6642@node Xtensa
6643@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6644
6645@cindex Xtensa processors
6646The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
6647@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
6648specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
6649keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
6650example, with the command:
6651
6652@smallexample
6653SECTIONS
6654@{
6655 .text : @{
6656 *(.literal .text)
6657 @}
6658@}
6659@end smallexample
6660
6661@noindent
6662@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
6663and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
6664literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
6665interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
6666group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
6667files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
6668and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 6669
43cd72b9 6670@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 6671@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
6672Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
6673provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
6674is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
6675literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
6676will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
6677location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
6678the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
6679unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
6680@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
6681range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
6682
6683For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
6684to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
6685instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
6686instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
6687instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
6688@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
6689hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
6690By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
6691switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
6692density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
6693instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
6694performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
6695linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
6696a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
6697
6698The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
6699control the linker:
6700
6701@cindex Xtensa options
6702@table @option
e0001a05 6703@kindex --no-relax
43cd72b9
BW
6704@item --no-relax
6705Since the Xtensa version of @code{ld} enables the @option{--relax} option
6706by default, the @option{--no-relax} option is provided to disable
6707relaxation.
6708
6709@item --size-opt
6710When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
6711more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
6712no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
6713alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
6714preserve the correctness of the code.
6715@end table
e0001a05
NC
6716
6717@ifclear GENERIC
6718@lowersections
6719@end ifclear
6720@end ifset
6721
252b5132
RH
6722@ifclear SingleFormat
6723@node BFD
6724@chapter BFD
6725
6726@cindex back end
6727@cindex object file management
6728@cindex object formats available
6729@kindex objdump -i
6730The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
6731These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
6732object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
6733format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
6734it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
6735associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
6736object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
6737(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
6738list all the formats available for your configuration.
6739
6740@cindex BFD requirements
6741@cindex requirements for BFD
6742As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
6743several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
6744BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
6745formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
6746been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
6747BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
6748may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
6749
6750One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
6751mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
6752useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
6753conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
6754
6755@menu
6756* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
6757@end menu
6758
6759@node BFD outline
36f63dca 6760@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
6761@cindex opening object files
6762@include bfdsumm.texi
6763@end ifclear
6764
6765@node Reporting Bugs
6766@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
6767@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
6768@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 6769
ff5dcc92 6770Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
6771
6772Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
6773it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 6774to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 6775work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 6776@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
6777
6778In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
6779information that enables us to fix the bug.
6780
6781@menu
6782* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
6783* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
6784@end menu
6785
6786@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 6787@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
6788@cindex bug criteria
6789
6790If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
6791
6792@itemize @bullet
6793@cindex fatal signal
6794@cindex linker crash
6795@cindex crash of linker
6796@item
6797If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 6798@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
6799
6800@cindex error on valid input
6801@item
ff5dcc92 6802If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
6803
6804@cindex invalid input
6805@item
ff5dcc92 6806If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
6807may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
6808object files are correct.
6809
6810@item
6811If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 6812improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
6813@end itemize
6814
6815@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 6816@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 6817@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 6818@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
6819
6820A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 6821products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
6822recommend you contact that organization first.
6823
6824You can find contact information for many support companies and
6825individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
6826distribution.
6827
ad22bfe8 6828@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 6829Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
6830@value{BUGURL}.
6831@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6832
6833The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
6834@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
6835fact or leave it out, state it!
6836
6837Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
6838problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
6839assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
6840matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
6841the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
6842location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
6843were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
6844into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
6845specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 6846and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
6847
6848Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
6849the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
6850on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
6851
6852Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
6853bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
6854respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
6855You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
6856
6857To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
6858
6859@itemize @bullet
6860@item
ff5dcc92 6861The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
6862the @samp{--version} argument.
6863
6864Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 6865the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
6866
6867@item
ff5dcc92 6868Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
6869patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
6870
6871@item
6872The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
6873version number.
6874
6875@item
ff5dcc92 6876What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
6877``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
6878
6879@item
6880The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
6881observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
6882list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
6883sufficient.
6884
6885If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
6886and then we might not encounter the bug.
6887
6888@item
6889A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
6890bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
6891provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
6892bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
6893state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
6894requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
6895we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
6896attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
6897
6898If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
6899@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
6900object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
6901@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
6902how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
6903
6904@item
6905A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
6906incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
6907
ff5dcc92 6908Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
6909will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
6910not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
6911a chance to make a mistake.
6912
6913Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
6914say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 6915copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
6916C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
6917and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
6918fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
6919you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
6920any conclusion from our observations.
6921
6922@item
ff5dcc92 6923If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
6924diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
6925@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 6926If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
6927context, not by line number.
6928
6929The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
6930sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
6931@end itemize
6932
6933Here are some things that are not necessary:
6934
6935@itemize @bullet
6936@item
6937A description of the envelope of the bug.
6938
6939Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
6940which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
6941changes will not affect it.
6942
6943This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
6944will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
6945with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
6946We recommend that you save your time for something else.
6947
6948Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
6949of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
6950output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
6951less time, and so on.
6952
6953However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
6954report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
6955
6956@item
6957A patch for the bug.
6958
6959A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
6960the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
6961a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
6962to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
6963
ff5dcc92 6964Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
6965construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
6966through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
6967able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
6968fixed.
6969
6970And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
6971patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
6972help us to understand.
6973
6974@item
6975A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
6976
6977Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
6978things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
6979@end itemize
6980
6981@node MRI
6982@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
6983@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
6984To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
6985linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
6986alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
6987described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
6988simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 6989@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
6990linker commands; these commands are described here.
6991
6992In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
6993file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
6994features to make use of them.
6995
6996You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
6997@samp{-c} command-line option.
6998
6999Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7000command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7001blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7002MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7003issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7004
7005Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7006
7007You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7008lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7009The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7010
7011@table @code
7012@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7013@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7014@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7015Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7016the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7017@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7018your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7019script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7020commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7021input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7022@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7023
7024@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7025@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7026Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7027in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7028
7029@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7030
7031@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7032@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7033Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7034@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7035
7036@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7037@item BASE @var{expression}
7038Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7039absolute addresses) in the output file.
7040
7041@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7042@item CHIP @var{expression}
7043@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7044This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7045
7046@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7047@item END
7048This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7049
7050@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7051@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7052Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7053language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7054
7055@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7056@item
252b5132
RH
7057S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7058
7059@item
7060IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7061
7062@item
7063COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7064@samp{COFF}
7065@end enumerate
7066
7067@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7068@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7069Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7070@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7071
7072The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7073same line, with no change in its effect.
7074
7075@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7076@item LOAD @var{filename}
7077@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7078Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7079same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7080command line.
7081
7082@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7083@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7084@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7085MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7086option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7087
7088@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7089@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7090@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7091Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7092order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7093script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7094sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7095file, in the order specified.
7096
7097@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7098@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7099@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7100@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7101Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7102@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7103
7104@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7105@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7106@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7107@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7108You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7109specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7110If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7111@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7112@end table
7113
36f63dca 7114@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7115
370b66a1
CD
7116@node LD Index
7117@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7118
7119@printindex cp
7120
7121@tex
7122% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7123% meantime:
7124\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7125\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7126\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7127\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7128\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7129\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7130\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7131\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7132\page\colophon
7133% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7134@end tex
7135
252b5132 7136@bye
This page took 0.839078 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.